US20220077413A1 - Organoelectroluminescent Element, and Light Emission Device, Display Device, and Illumination Device in which Said Organoelectroluminescent Element is Used - Google Patents

Organoelectroluminescent Element, and Light Emission Device, Display Device, and Illumination Device in which Said Organoelectroluminescent Element is Used Download PDF

Info

Publication number
US20220077413A1
US20220077413A1 US17/501,436 US202117501436A US2022077413A1 US 20220077413 A1 US20220077413 A1 US 20220077413A1 US 202117501436 A US202117501436 A US 202117501436A US 2022077413 A1 US2022077413 A1 US 2022077413A1
Authority
US
United States
Prior art keywords
group
light
layer
ring
aforementioned
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
US17/501,436
Inventor
Naoyuki Hayashi
Hideki Yasuda
Koji Takaku
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
UDC Ireland Ltd
Original Assignee
UDC Ireland Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by UDC Ireland Ltd filed Critical UDC Ireland Ltd
Priority to US17/501,436 priority Critical patent/US20220077413A1/en
Publication of US20220077413A1 publication Critical patent/US20220077413A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K71/00Manufacture or treatment specially adapted for the organic devices covered by this subclass
    • H10K71/10Deposition of organic active material
    • H10K71/191Deposition of organic active material characterised by provisions for the orientation or alignment of the layer to be deposited
    • H01L51/50
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K50/00Organic light-emitting devices
    • H01L51/0012
    • H01L51/5012
    • H01L51/5016
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K50/00Organic light-emitting devices
    • H10K50/10OLEDs or polymer light-emitting diodes [PLED]
    • H10K50/11OLEDs or polymer light-emitting diodes [PLED] characterised by the electroluminescent [EL] layers
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K50/00Organic light-emitting devices
    • H10K50/80Constructional details
    • H10K50/85Arrangements for extracting light from the devices
    • H01L2251/558
    • H01L51/006
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K2101/00Properties of the organic materials covered by group H10K85/00
    • H10K2101/10Triplet emission
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K2102/00Constructional details relating to the organic devices covered by this subclass
    • H10K2102/301Details of OLEDs
    • H10K2102/351Thickness
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H10SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES; ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES NOT OTHERWISE PROVIDED FOR
    • H10KORGANIC ELECTRIC SOLID-STATE DEVICES
    • H10K85/00Organic materials used in the body or electrodes of devices covered by this subclass
    • H10K85/60Organic compounds having low molecular weight
    • H10K85/631Amine compounds having at least two aryl rest on at least one amine-nitrogen atom, e.g. triphenylamine
    • H10K85/633Amine compounds having at least two aryl rest on at least one amine-nitrogen atom, e.g. triphenylamine comprising polycyclic condensed aromatic hydrocarbons as substituents on the nitrogen atom

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to an organoelectroluminescent element and to a light emission device, a display device, and an illumination device in which this organoelectroluminescent element is used.
  • Organoelectroluminescent elements are a self-emitting type of display device and are used in display and lighting applications.
  • a display featuring an organoelectroluminescent element has advantageous display performance in that its visibility is better than that of conventional CRTs or LCDs, and that it has lower dependence on the viewing angle.
  • Another advantage is that the display can be made more lightweight and thinner.
  • an organoelectroluminescent element offers the potential to use a flexible substrate to achieve lighting in shapes that could not be obtained up to now.
  • the refractive index of the layers that make up an organoelectroluminescent element, including the light-emitting layer is generally higher than that of air.
  • the refractive index of the light-emitting layer or another organic layer in an organoelectroluminescent element is from 1.6 to 2.1. Therefore, emitted light tends to be totally reflected at the interface, so the extraction efficiency thereof is less than 20%, with most of the light ending up being lost.
  • a generally known organoelectroluminescent element is constituted by having an organic layer disposed between a pair of electrode layers on a substrate.
  • This organic layer includes a light-emitting layer, and the organoelectroluminescent element emits light emitted from this light-emitting layer from the side of the light extraction face.
  • the entire reflection component (light at or above a critical angle) cannot be extracted at the interface between the organic layer and the electrode layer or the light extraction face, one problem is that the light extraction efficiency is low.
  • Non-Patent Document 1 a method has been proposed in which the light extraction efficiency is improved by using a light-emitting material that is oriented in the horizontal direction, in the light-emitting layer.
  • the present invention was devised in light of the aforementioned problems encountered in the past, and it is an object thereof to achieve the following: namely, it is an object of the present invention to provide an organoelectroluminescent element in which the order parameter of the light-emitting material in the light-emitting layer is at least 0.7, and the light-emitting material is oriented in the horizontal direction with respect to the substrate, wherein a high external quantum efficiency and high power efficiency can both be satisfied at the same time, and to provide a light emission device, a display device, and an illumination device in which this organoelectroluminescent element is used.
  • An organoelectroluminescent element which has on a substrate an anode, a first intermediate organic layer composed of at least one organic layer, a light-emitting layer, a second intermediate organic layer composed of at least one organic layer, and a cathode in this order and in which light is extracted from the aforementioned anode side, wherein
  • the aforementioned light-emitting layer contains a light-emitting material that is oriented in the horizontal direction with the substrate, the order parameter of the aforementioned light-emitting material in the aforementioned light-emitting layer is at least 0.7, and
  • the relationship between the thickness T1 (nm) of the aforementioned first intermediate organic layer and the thickness T2 (nm) of the aforementioned second intermediate organic layer is such that 1.1 ⁇ T1/T2 ⁇ 4.0 and also such that 20 nm ⁇ T2 ⁇ 80 nm.
  • the labeling number for each of the general formulas is indicated in parentheses, but we have omitted the parentheses in the translation to avoid confusion with other parenthetical notations.
  • Ar 1 to Ar 3 represent each independently a divalent C 6 to C 30 aromatic hydrocarbon group
  • Ar 4 to Ar 7 represent each independently a C 6 to C 30 aromatic hydrocarbon group
  • the two aromatic hydrocarbon groups constituting Ar 4 and Ar 5 may bond via a direct bond or a substituent to form a condensed heterocycle with the N replaced by Ar 4 and Ar 5
  • the two aromatic hydrocarbon groups constituting Ar 6 and Ar 7 may bond via a direct bond or a substituent to form a condensed heterocycle with the N replaced by Ar 6 and Ar 7
  • L 1 and L 2 represent each independently a vinylene group or an acetylene group
  • l, m, n, o, and p represent each independently an integer from 0 to 6, but one of l, n, and p is not 0.
  • the organoelectroluminescent element according to any one of (1) to (3) above, wherein the maximum emission wavelength of the aforementioned light-emitting material is 600 to 700 nm, and the relationship between the thickness T1 (nm) of the aforementioned first intermediate organic layer and the thickness T2 (nm) of the aforementioned second intermediate organic layer is such that 1.2 ⁇ T/T2 ⁇ 4.0 and also such that 30 nm ⁇ T2 ⁇ 80 nm.
  • the organoelectroluminescent element according to any one of (1) to (3) above, wherein the maximum emission wavelength of the aforementioned light-emitting material is 400 to 500 nm, and the relationship between the thickness T1 (nm) of the aforementioned first intermediate organic layer and the thickness T2 (nm) of the aforementioned second intermediate organic layer is such that 1.1 ⁇ T1/T2 ⁇ 3.0 and also such that 20 nm ⁇ T2 ⁇ 70 nm.
  • the organoelectroluminescent element according to any one of (1) to (5) above, wherein a light extraction layer is formed on the aforementioned substrate.
  • a light emission device in which the organoelectroluminescent element according to any one of (1) to (7) above is used.
  • a display device in which the organoelectroluminescent element according to any one of (1) to (7) above is used.
  • An illumination device in which the organoelectroluminescent element according to any one of (1) to (7) above is used.
  • an organoelectroluminescent element in which the order parameter of the light-emitting material in the light-emitting layer is at least 0.7, and the light-emitting material is oriented in the horizontal direction with respect to the substrate, wherein a high external quantum efficiency and high power efficiency can both be satisfied at the same time, and to provide a light emission device, a display device, and an illumination device in which this organoelectroluminescent element is used.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing one example of the configuration of the organoelectroluminescent element according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing one example of the light emission device according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing one example of the illumination device according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 4 is a model diagram for illustrating the molecular length of a material.
  • Substituent Group A and Substituent Group B are defined as follows:
  • Examples [of Substituent Group A] include alkyl groups (preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 10, such as a methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, tert-butyl, n-octyl, n-decyl, n-hexadecyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, and cyclohexyl); alkenyl groups (preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 10, such as a vinyl, allyl, 2-butenyl, and 3-pentenyl); alkynyl groups (preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 10, such as propargyl and 3-pentynyl); aryl
  • Examples [of Substituent Group B] include alkyl groups (preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 10, such as a methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, tert-butyl, n-octyl, n-decyl, n-hexadecyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, and cyclohexyl); alkenyl groups (preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 10, such as a vinyl, allyl, 2-butenyl, and 3-pentenyl); alkynyl groups (preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 10, such as propargyl and 3-pentynyl); aryl
  • substituents may be further substituted, and examples of the further substituent include groups selected from the Substituent Group A 2 described above. 2 Translator's note: “Substituent Group B” is probably intended in the original rather than “Substituent Group A.”
  • the organoelectroluminescent element of the present invention is an organoelectroluminescent element which has on a substrate an anode, a first intermediate organic layer composed of at least one organic layer, a light-emitting layer, a second intermediate organic layer composed of at least one organic layer, and a cathode in this order and in which light is extracted from the aforementioned anode side, wherein the aforementioned light-emitting layer contains a light-emitting material that is oriented in the horizontal direction with the substrate, the order parameter of the aforementioned light-emitting material in the aforementioned light-emitting layer is at least 0.7, and the relationship between the thickness T1 (nm) of the aforementioned first intermediate organic layer and the thickness T2 (nm) of the aforementioned second intermediate organic layer is such that 1.1 ⁇ T1/T2 ⁇ 4.0 and also such that T2 ⁇ 80 nm [sic] 3 . 3 Translator's note: “20 nm ⁇ T2 ⁇ 80 nm” is
  • the organoelectroluminescent element of the present invention by setting the relationship between the thickness T1 (nm) of the aforementioned first intermediate organic layer and the thickness T2 (nm) of the aforementioned second intermediate organic layer such that 1.1 ⁇ T/T2 ⁇ 4.0 and also such that 20 nm ⁇ T2 ⁇ 80 nm in an organoelectroluminescent element in which the order parameter of the light-emitting material in the light-emitting layer is at least 0.7, and the light-emitting material is oriented in the horizontal direction with the substrate, it is possible to satisfy both a high external quantum efficiency and high power efficiency at the same time.
  • the thickness of the organic layer between the light-emitting layer and the cathode (this corresponds to the thickness T2 (nm) of the aforementioned second intermediate organic layer) needed to be increased so as to reduce quenching by metals, and the thickness of the organic layer between this light-emitting layer and the cathode needed to be the same as or greater than the thickness of the organic layer between the light-emitting layer and the anode (this corresponds to the thickness T1 (nm) of the aforementioned first intermediate organic layer) (that is, satisfying the relationship T1 ⁇ T2), so a problem was divergence from the optimal distance due to optical interference. Furthermore, the carrier concentration was low, and electron mobility was low in the electron transport layer and electron injection layer; therefore, as the thickness of the electron transport layer and the electron injection layer increased, the drive voltage rose, which was a problem in that power efficiency suffered.
  • the present invention is an organoelectroluminescent element that makes use of a light-emitting material that is oriented horizontally with respect to the substrate, wherein the thickness of the organic layer between the light-emitting layer and the anode (this corresponds to the thickness T1 (nm) of the aforementioned first intermediate organic layer) and the thickness of the organic layer between the light-emitting layer and the cathode (this corresponds to the thickness T2 (nm) of the aforementioned second intermediate organic layer) satisfy the relationship described above, the result of which is the discovery that it is possible to provide an organoelectroluminescent element in which the optimal length of optical interference can be achieved, and the thickness of the second intermediate organic layer (such as the electron injection layer or electron transport layer) can be reduced, so high external quantum efficiency and high power efficiency can both be satisfied at the same time.
  • the thickness of the organic layer between the light-emitting layer and the anode this corresponds to the thickness T1 (nm) of the aforementioned first intermediate organic layer
  • the organoelectroluminescent element of the present invention will now be described below.
  • the present invention provides an organoelectroluminescent element which has on a substrate an anode, a first intermediate organic layer composed of at least one organic layer, a light-emitting layer, a second intermediate organic layer composed of at least one organic layer, and a cathode in this order and in which light is extracted from the aforementioned anode side.
  • FIG. 1 shows an example of the configuration of the organoelectroluminescent element according to the present invention.
  • the organoelectroluminescent element 10 according to the present invention shown in FIG. 1 is such that a light-emitting layer 6 is sandwiched between an anode 3 and a cathode 9 on a support substrate 2 , and a light extraction layer 15 is formed on the side opposite from the side on which the anode 3 is formed.
  • a hole injection layer 4 , a hole transport layer 5 , the light-emitting layer 6 , a first electron transport layer 7 , and a second electron transport layer 8 are formed in this order between the anode 3 and the cathode 9 .
  • the first intermediate organic layer is composed of the hole injection layer 4 and the hole transport layer 5
  • the thickness T1 of the first intermediate organic layer is the sum of the thickness of the hole injection layer 4 and the thickness of the hole transport layer 5
  • the second intermediate organic layer is composed of the first electron transport layer 7 and the second electron transport layer 8
  • the thickness T2 of the second intermediate organic layer is the sum of the thickness of the first electron transport layer 7 and the thickness of the second electron transport layer 8 .
  • the anode is preferably either transparent or semi-transparent.
  • the organic layers are formed on the front face [sic] 4 or one face of the aforementioned anode or the aforementioned cathode. 4 Translator's note: The word for “front face” here is probably an error in the original for “entire surface,” which happens to be homophonous in Japanese.
  • the present invention is in no way limited to these configurations.
  • the layers described between the anode and the light-emitting layer correspond to the first intermediate organic layer if they are organic layers
  • the layers described between the light-emitting layer and the cathode correspond to the second intermediate organic layer.
  • the substrate used in the present invention is preferably a substrate that will not scatter or attenuate light emitted from the organic layers.
  • a substrate that will not scatter or attenuate light emitted from the organic layers.
  • an organic material one with excellent heat resistance, dimensional stability, solvent resistance, electrical insulation properties, and workability is preferable.
  • a light extraction layer (described below) is formed on the substrate in the present invention, it is preferable to use glass with a high refractive index as the substrate in terms of further reducing guided light in the interior of the substrate and enhancing the external quantum efficiency and power efficiency, and it is more preferable if the refractive index of this glass with a high refractive index is at least 1.8.
  • the refractive index of this glass with a high refractive index is ordinarily 2.0 or less.
  • the anode may be formed on the substrate such as a high-refractive-index glass so as to be in direct contact therewith or may also be formed via a light extraction layer (described below).
  • a light extraction layer it is preferable for a light extraction layer to be formed on the substrate because the light extraction layer will reduce guided light inside the substrate and will increase the external quantum efficiency and the power efficiency.
  • the light extraction layer formed on the substrate may be formed on the opposite side of the substrate from the side on which the anode is formed, or it may be formed at the interface between the substrate and the anode on the same side of the substrate as the side on which the anode is formed.
  • Examples of light extraction layers include a light scattering layer and a prism sheet.
  • a light scattering layer is a polymer layer composed of titanium dioxide, silica, or another such inorganic material, or polystyrene, PMMA, or another such organic material, and in which microparticles (from a few nanometers to a few microns in size) are dispersed, while a prism sheet is in the form of a triangular pyramid composed of an organic material formed by printing (such as screen printing), embossing, light patterning, nanoimprinting, or the like.
  • These layers can be formed directly on the substrate, or by forming them on a film and then transferring them to the substrate, or by bonding a film to the substrate, or another such method. Moreover, these layers may be formed either at the interface between the substrate and the air or at the interface between the substrate and a transparent electrode (the anode), or at both locations.
  • a prism sheet or a light scattering layer may be used, or both may be used in combination.
  • the thickness of the light extraction layer is preferably 0.01 to 10 ⁇ m, more preferably 0.1 to 5 ⁇ m, and even more preferably 0.5 to 3 ⁇ m.
  • the anode In general, there are no particular restrictions on the shape, structure, size, and so forth of the anode as long as it functions as an electrode that supplies holes to the organic layers and it can also extract the light generated at the light-emitting layer of the element from the anode side; one can be suitably selected from publicly known electrode materials depending on the purpose and application of the light-emitting element.
  • the anode is usually provided as a transparent or semi-transparent anode.
  • the cathode In general, there are no particular restrictions on the shape, structure, size, and so forth of the cathode as long as it functions as an electrode that injects electrons into the organic layers, and one can be suitably selected from publicly known electrode materials depending on the purpose and application of the light-emitting element.
  • each of the organic layers can be favorably formed by vapor deposition, sputtering, or another such dry film formation method, or by transfer, printing, spin coating, bar coating, ink jet, spray, or another such solution coating process. It is considered that the use of a liquid coating process leads to increased productivity and increased surface area of the organic EL element.
  • Dry methods that can be used include vapor deposition and sputtering, while wet methods that can be used include dipping, spin coating, dip coating, casting, die coating, roll coating, bar coating, gravure coating, spray coating, and inkjetting.
  • the appropriate film formation method can be selected as dictated by the material of the organic layer. If the film is formed by a wet method, it may be dried afterward. The temperature, pressure, and other conditions in the drying are selected so as not to damage the coating layer.
  • the coating solution used in the aforementioned wet film formation methods is usually composed of the material of the organic layer and a solvent for dissolving or dispersing it.
  • a solvent for dissolving or dispersing it There are no particular restrictions on the solvent, which may be selected according to the material used for the organic layer.
  • the amount contained in the coating solution is preferably 0.1 to 50 wt %, more preferably 0.3 to 40 wt %, and even more preferably 0.3 to 30 wt %.
  • the viscosity is generally 1 to 30 mPa ⁇ s, more preferably 1.5 to 20 mPa ⁇ s, and even more preferably 1.5 to 15 m Pa ⁇ s.
  • the coating solution is preferably obtained by dissolving the organoelectroluminescent element material in a specified organic solvent, filtering the solution, and then using [the product] to coat a specified support or layer.
  • the pore size of the filter used for filtration is 2.0 ⁇ m or less, more preferably 0.5 ⁇ m or less, and even more preferably 0.3 ⁇ m or less, and is preferably made of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), polyethylene, or nylon.
  • solvents examples include publicly known organic solvents such as aromatic hydrocarbon-based solvents, alcohol-based solvents, ketone-based solvents, aliphatic hydrocarbon-based solvents, and amide-based solvents.
  • aromatic hydrocarbon-based solvents examples include benzene, toluene, xylene, trimethylbenzene, tetramethylbenzene, cumene ethylbenzenen [sic] 5 , methyl propyl benzene, and methyl isopropyl benzene, with toluene, xylene, cumene, and trimethylbenzene being more preferable.
  • the dielectric constant of an aromatic hydrocarbon-based solvent is usually 3 or lower. 5 Translator's note: apparent error in the original; “cumene ethylbenzenen” should be “cumene, ethylbenzenen” (as two separate terms).
  • alcohol-based solvents examples include methanol, ethanol, butanol, benzyl alcohol, and cyclohexanol, with butanol, benzyl alcohol, and cyclohexanol being more preferable.
  • the dielectric constant of an alcohol-based solvent is usually 10 to 40.
  • ketone-based solvents include 1-octanone, 2-octanone, 1-nonanone, 2-nonanone, acetone, 4-heptanone, 1-hexanone, 2-hexanone, diisobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone, methyl cyclohexanone, phenyl acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, acetyl acetone, acetonyl acetone, ionone, diacetonyl alcohol, acetyl carbinol, acetophenone, methyl naphthyl ketone, isophorone, and propylene carbonate, with methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, and propylene carbonate being preferable.
  • the dielectric constant of a ketone-based solvent is usually 10 to 90.
  • aliphatic hydrocarbon-based solvents examples include pentane, hexane, octane, and decane, with octane and decane being preferable.
  • the dielectric constant of an aliphatic hydrocarbon-based solvent is usually 1.5 to 2.0.
  • amide-based solvents examples include N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-ethyl-2-pyrrolidone, N,N-dimethylacetamide, N,N-dimethylformamide 6 , and 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone, with N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone being preferable.
  • the dielectric constant of an amide-based solvent is usually 30 to 40. 6 Translator's note: This chemical term appears garbled as a nonsensical word in the original Japanese document due to an apparent word processing error. We have ignored this obvious error and used a most likely intended chemical term in this translation.
  • the aforementioned solvents may be used alone, or two or more types may be used together.
  • first solvent an aromatic hydrocarbon-based solvent
  • second solvent having a higher dielectric constant than the first solvent
  • the mix ratio (by weight) of the first solvent and the second solvent is 1/99 to 99/1, preferably 10/90 to 90/10, and more preferably 20/80 to 70/30.
  • a mixed solvent containing at least 60 wt % of the first solvent is preferable.
  • the coating solution for forming the organic layer contains a compound having a polymerizable group, and the polymer that forms the organic layer is formed by the polymerization reaction of this compound having a polymerizable group, the polymerization reaction will be promoted in the formation of the polymer by heating or optical irradiation following the application of the organic film.
  • the heating temperature is generally from 100 to 200° C., and preferably from 120 to 160° C.
  • the heating time is generally from 1 to 120 minutes, preferably from 1 to 60 minutes, and more preferably from 1 to 30 minutes.
  • Further examples include a polymerization reaction under UV irradiation, a polymerization reaction with a platinum catalyst, and a polymerization reaction with an iron catalyst such as iron chloride. These polymerization methods may be used in combination with a polymerization method involving heating.
  • the light-emitting material contained by the light-emitting layer in the present invention is oriented in the horizontal direction with the substrate in the light-emitting layer.
  • the phrase] “the light-emitting material is oriented in the horizontal direction with the substrate” refers to a state in which the long-axis direction of the light-emitting material and the direction of the horizontal plane of the substrate substantially coincide, or in the case of a planar light-emitting material, a state in which the plane of the light-emitting material and the direction of the horizontal plane of the substrate substantially coincide.
  • the light-emitting material is oriented in the horizontal direction with the substrate can be confirmed by a method such as the deflection measurement of photoluminescence discussed, for example, in non-patent document titled ATR-IR Deflection Measurement (Applied Physics Letters, Vol. 96, 073302).
  • the order parameter of the light-emitting material in the light-emitting layer in the present invention is at least 0.7.
  • a washed quartz substrate is put in a vapor deposition device, a film is produced by vapor-depositing a material containing the light-emitting material, and the order parameter of the light-emitting material can be calculated by the aforementioned deflection measurement of ATR-IR, deflection measurement of photoluminescence, or another such method.
  • a state in which the order parameter measured by a method such as these is at least 0.7 refers to a state in which the long-axis direction of the light-emitting material in the light-emitting layer and the direction of the horizontal plane of the substrate substantially coincide, or in the case of a planar light-emitting material, a state in which the plane of the light-emitting material and the direction of the horizontal plane of the substrate substantially coincide (that is, a state in which “the light-emitting material is oriented in the horizontal direction with the substrate”), and this significantly reduces the proportion of the emission of a component that undergoes quenching by metals when the element is used for organic electroluminescence.
  • the order parameter of the light-emitting material in the light-emitting layer in the present invention is preferably at least 0.7 and no more than 1.0, and more preferably at least 0.8 and no more than 1.0.
  • any light-emitting material publicly known in the past can be used as the light-emitting material in the present invention so long as it is oriented horizontally with the substrate in the light-emitting layer and the order parameter is at least 0.7, but from the standpoint of improving the orientation of the light-emitting material, the aspect ratio (molecular length/molecular thickness) is preferably greater than 3, more preferably greater than 5, and even more preferably greater than 5 and no more than 30, with 5.3 to 20 being especially favorable.
  • the “molecular length” of the host material (described later) and the light-emitting material means the average values ((a+b)/2) of the lengths a and b of two sides of the closest quadrangle when the molecule of the material is imagined to have a flat structure as shown in FIG. 4 .
  • the term “closest quadrangle” here is defined as a quadrangle when the average values of a and b ((a+b)/2) are at their minimum out of a quadrangle (rectangle or square) that is tangent to the molecule on two sides.
  • This “molecular length” is stipulated as follows by the theoretical calculation: Specifically, a density functional method is used, and in concrete terms, [this length is found] by using Gaussian 03 (from the US firm of Gaussian) to perform structural optimization computation with a basis function of 6-31G* and an exchange-correlation functional of B3LYP/LANL2DZ. The optimized structure obtained by structural optimization computation is used to define the molecular length as the average length of two sides of the closest quadrangle in ball-and-stick display.
  • molecular thickness means the thickness of the molecule in the Z axis direction, which is perpendicular to the X axis and the Y axis when we let the flat portions of the aforementioned flat structure be the X axis and Y axis (for example, the Y axis is the direction of the side with length a in FIG. 4 , and the X axis is the direction of the side with length b).
  • the molecular thickness is also found by the same method as that used for the molecular length, and the length in the thickness direction of the molecular in ball-and-stick display is defined as the molecular thickness.
  • Fluorescent materials and phosphorescent materials that satisfy the aforementioned conditions can be used as the light-emitting material, but a platinum complex (a phosphorescent material), a pyrene derivative (a fluorescent material), a perylene derivative (a fluorescent material), or a n-conjugated compound expressed by General Formula R-1 (described later) is preferable because it has a planar structure, and there is a greater likelihood that the aforementioned aspect ratio will be 3 or higher.
  • a platinum complex (a phosphorescent material), a pyrene derivative (a fluorescent material), or a n-conjugated compound expressed by General Formula R-1 (described later) is more preferable from the standpoint of planarity.
  • the platinum complex is preferably platinum (a platinum complex) that is tetradentate, which is a planar coordination structure, and a platinum complex with a salen-based or porphyrin-based skeleton is more preferable.
  • the aforementioned platinum complex is preferably a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-1.
  • Q 1 , Q 2 , Q 3 , and Q 4 represent each independently a ligand coordinated to platinum.
  • L 1 , L 2 , and L 3 represent each independently a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Q 1 , Q 2 , Q 3 , and Q 4 represent each independently a ligand coordinated to platinum.
  • the bonds between the platinum and Q 1 , Q 2 , Q 3 , and Q 4 here may be covalent bonds, ion bonds, coordination bonds, or the like.
  • the atom in Q 1 , Q 2 , Q 3 , and Q 4 that is bound to the platinum is preferably a carbon atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a phosphorus atom.
  • at least one is preferably a carbon atom, more preferably two are carbon atoms, and it is especially preferable if two are carbon atoms and two are nitrogen atoms.
  • Q 1 , Q 2 , Q 3 , and Q 4 bound to platinum by a carbon atom may be either an anionic ligand or a neutral ligand.
  • anionic ligands include a vinyl ligand, an aromatic hydrocarbon ring ligand (such as a benzene ligand, a naphthalene ligand, an anthracene ligand, and a phenanthrene ligand), a heterocyclic ligand (such as a furan ligand, a thiophene ligand, a pyridine ligand, a pyrazine ligand, a pyrimidine ligand, a pyridazine ligand, a triazine ligand, a thiazole ligand, an oxazole ligand, a pyrrole ligand, an imidazole ligand, a pyrazole ligand, a triazole ligand,
  • Q 1 , Q 2 , Q 3 , and Q 4 bound to a platinum by a nitrogen atom may be either a neutral ligand or anionic ligand, and examples of neutral ligands include a nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocyclic ligand (such as a pyridine ligand, a pyrazine ligand, a pyrimidine ligand, a pyridazine ligand, a triazine ligand, an imidazole ligand, a pyrazole ligand, a triazole ligand, an oxazole ligand, a thiazole ligand, as well as condensed rings containing these [ligands] (such as a quinoline ligand or a benzimidazole ligand)), an amine ligand, a nitrile ligand, and an imine ligand.
  • neutral ligands include a nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocyclic ligand (such
  • anionic ligands include an amino ligand, an imino ligand, a nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocyclic ligand (such as a pyrrole ligand, an imidazole ligand, a triazole ligand, as well as condensed rings containing these [ligands] (such as an indole ligand or a benzimidazole ligand)).
  • a nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocyclic ligand such as a pyrrole ligand, an imidazole ligand, a triazole ligand, as well as condensed rings containing these [ligands] (such as an indole ligand or a benzimidazole ligand)).
  • Q 1 , Q 2 , Q 3 , and Q 4 bound to a platinum by an oxygen atom may be either a neutral ligand or anionic ligand, and examples of neutral ligands include an ether ligand, a ketone ligand, an ester ligand, an amido ligand, an oxygen-containing heterocyclic ligand (such as a furane ligand, an oxazole ligand, and condensed rings containing these [ligands] (such as a benzoxazole ligand)).
  • anionic ligands include an alkoxy ligand, an aryloxy ligand, a heteroaryloxy ligand, an acyloxy ligand, and a silyloxy ligand.
  • Q 1 , Q 2 , Q 3 , and Q 4 bound to a platinum by a sulfur atom may be either a neutral ligand or anionic ligand
  • neutral ligands include a thioether ligand, a thioketone ligand, a thioester ligand, a thioamido ligand, a sulfur-containing heterocyclic ligand (such as a thiophene ligand, a thiazole ligand, and condensed rings containing these [ligands] (such as a benzothiazole ligand)).
  • anionic ligands include an alkylmercapto ligand, an arylmercapto ligand, and a heteroarylmercapto ligand.
  • Q 1 , Q 2 , Q 3 , and Q 4 bound to a platinum by a phosphorus atom may be either a neutral ligand or anionic ligand, and examples of neutral ligands include a phosphine ligand, a phosphate ester ligand, a phosphite ester ligand, a phosphorus-containing heterocyclic ligand (such as a phosphinine ligand).
  • anionic ligands include a phosphino ligand, a phosphinyl ligand, and a phosphoryl ligand.
  • the ligands represented by Q 1 , Q 2 , Q 3 , and Q 4 may have a substituent, and those listed as the aforementioned Substituent Group A can be used as the substituent as needed. Moreover, the substituents may also be linked to each other. If substituents of Q 3 and Q 4 are linked to each other, the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-1 is a platinum complex of a cyclic tetradentate ligand.
  • the ligands represented by Q 1 , Q 2 , Q 3 , and Q 4 are preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon ring ligand bound to platinum by a carbon atom, an aromatic heterocyclic ligand bound to platinum by a carbon atom, a nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocyclic ligand bound to platinum by a nitrogen atom, an acyloxy ligand, an alkoxy ligand, an aryloxy ligand, a heteroaryloxy ligand, or a silyloxy ligand, more preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon ring ligand bound to platinum by a carbon atom, an aromatic heterocyclic ligand bound to platinum by a carbon atom, a nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocyclic ligand bound to platinum by a nitrogen atom, an acyloxy ligand, or an aryloxy ligand, and even more preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon ring ligand bound to platinum by a carbon atom, an aromatic heterocyclic ligand bound to platinum by a carbon atom,
  • L 1 , L 2 , and L 3 represent a single bond, a double bond, a divalent linking group, or a group that is a combination of these.
  • the divalent linking group represented by L 1 , L 2 , and L 3 include alkylene groups (such as methylene, ethylene, and propylene), arylene groups (phenylene and naphthalenediyl), heteroarylene groups (such as pyridinediyl and thiophenediyl), imino groups (—NR—) (such as a phenylimino group), an oxy group (—O—), a thio group (—S—), phosphinidene groups (—PR—) (such as a phenylphosphinidene group), silylene groups (—SiRR′—) (such as a dimethylsilylene group and diphenylsilylene group), a carbonyl group, as well as combinations of these.
  • alkylene groups such as methylene,
  • linking groups may further have a substituent.
  • R and R′ represent each independently a substituent.
  • the substituents listed as the aforementioned Substituent Group A can be used as these substituents. If there are a plurality of [each of] these substituents, the substituents may bond to each other to form a ring.
  • L 2 and L 3 are preferably a single bond, an alkylene group, an arylene group, a heteroarylene group, an imino group, an oxy group, a thio group, or a silylene group, more preferably a single bond, an alkylene group, an arylene group, or an imino group, even more preferably a single bond, an alkylene group, or an arylene group, still more preferably a single bond, a methylene group, or a phenylene group, yet still more preferably a single bond or a methylene group in which two hydrogen atoms are substituted, especially preferably a single bond or a dimethylmethylene group, and most preferably a single bond.
  • L 1 is preferably an alkylene group, an arylene group, a heteroarylene group, an imino group, an oxy group, a thio group, a silylene group, or a carbonyl group, more preferably an alkylene group, an arylene group, or an imino group, even more preferably an alkylene group or an imino group, especially preferably a methylene group or an imino group.
  • These may have a substituent, and the substituents listed as the aforementioned Substituent Group A can be used as these substituents. If there are a plurality of [each of] these substituents, the substituents may bond to each other to form a ring.
  • L 1 is more preferably a single bond, a methylene group in which two hydrogen atoms are substituted, or an arylimino group that may be substituted, even more preferably a dimethylmethylene group, an ethylmethylmethylene group, a methylpropylmethylene group, an isobutylmethylmethylene group, a cyclohexanediyl group, a cyclopentanediyl group, a fluoromethylmethylene group, or a phenylimino group, and especially preferably a dimethylmethylene group or a phenylimino group. If possible, these groups may further be substituted with a group [from those] listed in the aforementioned Substituent Group A.
  • L 21 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • a 21 , A 22 , B 21 , and B 22 represent each independently a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom. However, at least two of A 21 , A 22 , B 21 , and B 22 represent a nitrogen atom.
  • Z 21 , Z 22 , Z 23 , and Z 24 represent each independently a benzene ring or a nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocycle.
  • L 21 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and the preferred ranges are the same as those of L 1 in General Formula C-1 above.
  • a 21 , A 22 , B 21 , and B 22 represent each independently a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom, but at least two of these represent a nitrogen atom. In addition, it is preferable if two or three of A 21 , A 22 , B 21 , and B 22 represent a nitrogen atom, and it is more preferable if two of these represent a nitrogen atom. From the standpoint of the stability of the complex, it is preferable for A 21 and A 22 to represent a nitrogen atom or for B 21 and B 22 to represent a nitrogen atom.
  • Z 21 , Z 22 , Z 23 , and Z 24 represent each independently a benzene ring or a nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocycle.
  • Examples of the nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocycle represented by Z 21 , Z 22 , Z 23 , and Z 24 include a pyridine ring, a pyrimidine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyridazine ring, a triazine ring, an imidazole ring, a pyrazole ring, an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a triazole ring, an oxadiazole ring, and a thiadiazole ring.
  • the ring represented by Z 21 and Z 22 is preferably a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, a pyrazine ring, an imidazole ring, or a pyrazole ring, and more preferably a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, or a pyrazole ring.
  • the ring represented by Z 23 and Z 24 is preferably a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, a pyrazine ring, an imidazole ring, or a pyrazole ring, more preferably a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, or a pyrazole ring, and even more preferably a benzene ring or a pyridine ring.
  • the aforementioned benzene ring and nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocycle represented by Z 2 , Z 2 , Z 23 , and Z 24 may have a substituent, and [a group from] the aforementioned Substituent Group A can be used as a substituent on a carbon atom, while [a group from] the aforementioned Substituent Group B can be used as a substituent on a nitrogen atom.
  • the substituent on a carbon atom is preferably an alkyl group, a fluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a dialkylamino group, a diarylamino group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a silyl group, a cyano group, or a halogen atom, more preferably an alkyl group, a fluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic group, a diarylamino group, an alkoxy group, a cyano group, or a halogen atom, and even more preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group.
  • the aforementioned alkyl group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C 1 to C 20 alkyl group and may have a linear, branched, or cyclic structure.
  • the aforementioned alkyl group is preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, examples of which include a methyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, an octyl group, a decyl group, and a dodecyl group.
  • the aforementioned aryl group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C 6 to C 10 aryl group and may be condensed into a ring, examples of which include a phenyl group, a toluyl group, and a naphthyl group.
  • the aforementioned fluoroalkyl group is preferably a trifluoromethyl group.
  • the aforementioned alkoxy group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C 1 to C 20 alkoxy group and may have a linear, branched, or cyclic structure.
  • the aforementioned alkoxy group is preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, examples of which include a methoxy group, a butyloxy group, an octyloxy group, a decyloxy group, a dodecyloxy group, an s-octyloxy group, and a benzyloxy group.
  • the aforementioned heterocyclic group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C 6 to C 10 nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocyclic group and may be condensed into a ring, examples of which include a pyridine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyrimidine ring, a pyridazine ring, a triazine ring, and a carbazole ring, with a carbazole ring being preferable.
  • the aforementioned diarylamino group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C 6 to C 10 diarylamino group and may be condensed into a ring, examples of which include a diphenylamino group, a ditoluylamino group, and a dinaphthylamino group.
  • the aforementioned dialkylamino group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C 2 to C 20 dialkylamino group and may have a linear, branched, or cyclic structure.
  • the aforementioned dialkylamino group is preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 12, concrete examples of which include a dimethylamino group, a diethylamino group, a dioctylamino group, a didecylamino group, a didodecylamino group, a di-t-butylamino group, a di-t-amylamino group, and a di-s-butylamino group.
  • the aforementioned aryloxy group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C 6 to C 10 aryloxy group and may be condensed into a ring, examples of which include a phenyloxy group, a toluyloxy group, and a naphthyloxy group.
  • the aforementioned silyl group represents a silyl group which has been substituted with a C 3 to C 24 carbon atom and may be a trialkylsilyl group, an aryldialkylsilyl group, an alkyldiarylsilyl group, or a triarylsilyl group.
  • the aforementioned silyl group is preferably with a carbon number of 3 to 18, concrete examples of which include a trimethylsilyl group, a t-butyldimethylsilyl group, a triphenylsilyl group, and a t-butyldiphenylsilyl group.
  • the halogen atom is preferably a fluorine atom.
  • a linear alkyl group or the aforementioned substituent having a linear alkyl group as a substituent is preferable from the standpoint of aspect ratio.
  • Substituents are appropriately selected for the purpose of controlling the emission wavelength and electric potential, but if the wavelength is to be lengthened, [the substituent is] preferably an electron-donating group or an aromatic ring group; for example, an alkyl group, a dialkylamino group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, or the like is selected. Furthermore, if the wavelength is to be shortened, [the substituent is] preferably an electron-withdrawing group; for example, a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a trifluoroalkyl group, or the like is selected.
  • An alkyl group, an aryl group, or an aromatic heterocyclic group is preferable as a substituent on a nitrogen atom, and from the standpoint of the stability of the complex, an alkyl group or an aryl group is preferable.
  • the substituents on Z 21 , Z 22 , Z 23 , and Z 24 may be linked to each other to form a condensed ring, and examples of the ring thus formed include a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyridazine ring, a pyrimidine ring, an imidazole ring, an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a pyrazole ring, a thiophene ring, and a furan ring.
  • the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-2 is a platinum complex of cyclic tetradentate ligand.
  • One of the more preferred modes of the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-2 is a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-3 below:
  • a 301 to A 313 represent each independently C—R or a nitrogen atom.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • L 31 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Y, Z, and M represent each independently a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom, and either Z or Y is a nitrogen atom.
  • L 31 is defined the same as L 21 in General Formula C-2, and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • a 301 to A 306 represent each independently C—R or a nitrogen atom.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • Substituents listed as the aforementioned Substituent Group A can be used as the substituent represented by R.
  • a 301 to A 306 are preferably C—R, and the R [groups] may be linked to each other to form a ring.
  • the R [groups] of A 302 and A 305 are preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a dialkylamino group, a diarylamino group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a silyl group, a cyano group, or a halogen atom, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a diarylamino group, an alkoxy group, a cyano group, or a halogen atom, even more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or a cyano group, and especially
  • alkyl group and aryl group may further have a substituent, and examples of this substituent include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a cyano group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and a fluoroalkyl group, and are preferably a C 1 to C 6 alkyl group, a cyano group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and a fluoroalkyl group (preferably a trifluoromethyl group), more preferably a C 1 to C 6 alkyl group and a halogen atom (preferably a fluorine atom).
  • substituent include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a cyano group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and a fluoroalkyl group, and are preferably a C 1 to C 6 alkyl group, a cyano group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and a fluoroalkyl group (preferably a trifluoro
  • a 302 and A 305 are C—R
  • the R [groups] of these A 302 and A 305 are preferably an aryl group from the standpoint of improving durability of the element, and from the standpoint of short emission wavelength, a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an amino group, an alkoxy group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group is preferable.
  • the R [groups] of A 301 , A 303 , A 304 , and A 306 are preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an amino group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an amino group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a fluorine atom, and especially preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • a 307 , A 308 , A 309 , and A 310 represent each independently C—R or a nitrogen atom.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • Substituents listed as the aforementioned Substituent Group A can be used as the substituent represented by R.
  • the R [groups] are preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, a dialkylamino group, a diarylamino group, an alkyloxy group, a cyano group, or a halogen atom, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, a dialkylamino group, a cyano group, or a fluorine atom, and even more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, or a fluorine atom.
  • the substituents may be linked to each other to form a condensed ring structure.
  • Examples of the six-membered ring formed from A 307 , A 308 , A 309 , and A 310 and two carbon atoms in General Formula C-3 include a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyrimidine ring, a pyridazine ring, and a triazine ring, with a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyrimidine ring, and a pyridazine ring being more preferable, and a benzene ring and a pyridine ring being especially favorable.
  • the aforementioned six-membered ring is advantageous for the aforementioned six-membered ring to be a pyridine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyrimidine ring, or a pyridazine ring (with a pyridine ring being especially favorable) because the acidity of the hydrogen atoms present at the locations where the metal-carbon bonds are formed will be higher than with a benzene ring.
  • a 311 , A 312 , and A 313 represent each independently C—R or a nitrogen atom.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • Substituents listed as the aforementioned Substituent Group A can be used as the substituent represented by R.
  • the R [groups] are preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a dialkylamino group, a diarylamino group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a cyano group, or a halogen atom, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, a dialkylamino group, a cyano group, or a fluorine atom, and even more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, or a fluorine atom.
  • the substituents may be linked to each other to form a condensed ring structure.
  • At least one of A 311 , A 312 , and A 313 is a nitrogen atom, and it is especially preferable for A 311 to be a nitrogen atom.
  • One of the more preferred modes of the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-3 is a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-3-1 below:
  • X, Y, Z, and M represent each independently a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom. However, either Z or Y is a nitrogen atom. When Y is a nitrogen atom, X is a carbon atom.
  • m, n, p, and q represent each independently an integer from 0 to 3.
  • Ar represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group.
  • R 1 to R 3 and R 30 represent each independently an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a silyl group, or a heterocyclic group.
  • n, p, and q are 2 or greater, respectively adjacent ones of the plurality of R 1 , R 2 , R 3 , and R 30 [groups] may be linked to each other to form a cyclic structure.
  • Q is a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
  • X, Y, and Z represent a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom, either Z or Y is a nitrogen atom, and when Y is a nitrogen atom, X is a carbon atom. It is preferable for Z to be a carbon atom, for Y to be a nitrogen atom, and for X to be a carbon atom.
  • n, n, and p represent each independently an integer from 0 to 3.
  • m is preferably from 0 to 2 and more preferably 0 or 1.
  • n is preferably from 0 to 2 and more preferably 0 or 1.
  • p is preferably from 0 to 2 and more preferably 0 or 1.
  • R 1 to R 3 represent each independently an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a silyl group, or a heterocyclic group.
  • the aforementioned alkyl group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C 1 to C 20 alkyl group and may have a linear, branched, or cyclic structure.
  • the aforementioned alkyl group is preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, concrete examples of which include a methyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, an octyl group, a decyl group, and a dodecyl group.
  • the aforementioned aryl group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C 6 to C 10 aryl group and may be condensed into a ring, examples of which include a phenyl group, a toluyl group, and a naphthyl group.
  • the aforementioned alkoxy group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C 1 to C 20 alkoxy group and may have a linear, branched, or cyclic structure.
  • the aforementioned alkoxy group is preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, concrete examples of which include a methoxy group, an octyloxy group, a decyloxy group, a dodecyloxy group, an s-octyloxy group, and a benzyloxy group.
  • the aforementioned aryloxy group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C 6 to C 10 aryloxy group and may be condensed into a ring, examples of which include a phenyloxy group, a toluyloxy group, and a naphthyloxy group.
  • the aforementioned silyl group represents a silyl group which has been substituted with a C 3 to C 24 hydrocarbon group and may be a trialkylsilyl group, an aryldialkylsilyl group, an alkyldiarylsilyl group, or a triarylsilyl group.
  • the aforementioned silyl group is preferably with a carbon number of 3 to 18, concrete examples of which include a trimethylsilyl group, a t-butyldimethylsilyl group, a triphenylsilyl group, and a t-butyldiphenylsilyl group.
  • Examples of the aforementioned heterocyclic group include a pyridine ring, a pyrimidine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyridazine ring, a triazine ring, an imidazole ring, a pyrazole ring, an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a triazole ring, an oxadiazole ring, and a thiadiazole ring, a thiophen ring, and a furan ring.
  • a linear alkyl group or, in the case of a group other than an alkyl group, having an alkyl group as a substituent is preferable.
  • R 1 and R 2 are preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, a fluorine atom, a cyano group, or a silyl group, more preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group, and [even more] preferably a phenyl group.
  • R 3 is preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group, more preferably a methyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, or a phenyl group, and even more preferably a methyl group or a trifluoromethyl group.
  • Examples of the aryl group represented by Ar include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group, with a phenyl group being preferable.
  • the aryl group represented by Ar may further have a substituent, and examples of this substituent include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a cyano group, an amino group, a fluorine atom, and a fluoroalkyl group, with a C 1 to C 6 alkyl group, a cyano group, an amino group, a fluorine atom, or a fluoroalkyl group (preferably a trifluoromethyl group) being preferable, and a C 1 to C 6 alkyl group or a fluorine atom being more preferable.
  • Ar is more preferably a phenyl group having a substituent, and this substituent is preferably a methyl group, a t-butyl group, a 4-pentyl-cyclohexyl group, a 4-pentyl-cyclohexylmethoxy group, or the like.
  • n, and p are 2 or greater, respectively adjacent ones of the plurality of R 1 to R 3 [groups] may be linked to each other to form a cyclic structure.
  • M and Q are each independently a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
  • q represents an integer from 0 to 3 and is preferably an integer from 0 to 2.
  • R 30 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a silyl group, or a heterocyclic group.
  • the aforementioned alkyl group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C 1 to C 20 alkyl group and may have a linear, branched, or cyclic structure.
  • the aforementioned alkyl group is preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, concrete examples of which include a methyl group, an octyl group, a decyl group, a dodecyl group, an n-butyl group, a t-butyl group, a t-amyl group, and an s-butyl group.
  • the aforementioned aryl group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C 6 to C 10 aryl group and may be condensed into a ring, examples of which include a phenyl group, a toluyl group, and a naphthyl group.
  • the aforementioned alkoxy group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C 1 to C 20 alkoxy group and may have a linear, branched, or cyclic structure.
  • the aforementioned alkoxy group is preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, concrete examples of which include a methoxy group, an octyloxy group, a decyloxy group, a dodecyloxy group, an s-octyloxy group, and a benzyloxy group.
  • the aforementioned aryloxy group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C 6 to C 10 aryloxy group and may be condensed into a ring, concrete examples of which include a phenyloxy group, a toluyloxy group, and a naphthyloxy group.
  • the aforementioned silyl group represents a silyl group which has been substituted with a C 3 to C 24 carbon atom and may be a trialkylsilyl group, an aryldialkylsilyl group, an alkyldiarylsilyl group, or a triarylsilyl group.
  • the aforementioned silyl group is preferably with a carbon number of 3 to 18, concrete examples of which include a trimethylsilyl group, a t-butyldimethylsilyl group, a triphenylsilyl group, and a t-butyldiphenylsilyl group.
  • Examples of the aforementioned heterocyclic group include a pyridine ring, a pyrimidine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyridazine ring, a triazine ring, an imidazole ring, a pyrazole ring, an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a triazole ring, an oxadiazole ring, a thiadiazole ring, a thiophen ring, and a furan ring.
  • R 30 is preferably a fluorine atom.
  • R 30 is preferably a chain-form alkyl group or, in the case of a group other than an alkyl group, having an alkyl group as a substituent is preferable.
  • One of the more preferred modes of the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-2 is a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-4 below:
  • a 401 to A 414 represent each independently C—R or a nitrogen atom.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • L 41 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • a 401 to A 414 represent each independently C—R or a nitrogen atom.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • Substituents listed as the aforementioned Substituent Group A can be used as the substituent expressed by R.
  • a 401 to A 406 are preferably C—R, and the R [groups] may be linked to each other to form a ring.
  • the R [groups] of A 402 and A 405 are preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an amino group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an amino group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a fluorine atom, and especially preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • the R [groups] of A 401 , A 403 , A 404 , and A 406 are preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an amino group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an amino group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a fluorine atom, and especially preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • L 41 is defined the same as L 21 in General Formula C-2 above, and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • the number of nitrogen atoms in A 407 to A 410 and in A 411 to A 414 is each preferably 0 to 2 and more preferably 0 or 1.
  • the R [groups] of A 401 and A 412 are preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, an amino group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, a trifluoroalkyl group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group, and especially preferably a hydrogen atom, a phenyl group, a trifluoroalkyl group, or a cyano group.
  • the R [groups] of A 407 , A 409 , A 411 , and A 413 are preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, an amino group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, a trifluoroalkyl group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group, and especially preferably a hydrogen atom, a phenyl group, or a fluorine atom.
  • the R [groups] of A 410 and A 414 are preferably a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom and more preferably a hydrogen atom. If any of A 407 to A 409 and A 411 to A 413 represents C—R, the R [groups] may be linked to each other to form a ring, and examples of the ring thus formed include a benzene ring and a pyridine ring.
  • One of the more preferred modes of the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-2 is a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-5 below:
  • a 501 to A 512 represent each independently C—R or a nitrogen atom.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • L 51 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Y and Z represent each independently a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom, and at least either one is a nitrogen atom.
  • a 501 to A 506 and L 51 are defined the same as A 401 to A 406 and L 41 in General Formula C-4 above, and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • a 507 , A 508 , A 509 , A 510 , A 511 and A 512 represent each independently C—R or a nitrogen atom.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • Substituents listed as the aforementioned Substituent Group A can be used as the substituent represented by R.
  • R is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, a dialkylamino group, a diarylamino group, an alkyloxy group, a cyano group, or a halogen atom, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, a dialkylamino group, a cyano group, or a fluorine atom, and even more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, or a fluorine atom.
  • the substituents may be linked to each other to form a condensed ring structure.
  • a mode is also preferable in which at least one of A 507 , A 508 , and A 509 and at least one of A 510 , A 511 , and A 512 are nitrogen atoms, and in the case of this mode, it is preferable for A 510 or A 507 to be a nitrogen atom.
  • One of the more preferred modes of the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-5 is a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-5-1 below:
  • X, Y, and Z represent each independently a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom. However, either Z or Y is a nitrogen atom. When Y is a nitrogen atom, X is a carbon atom.
  • m, n, p, and q represent each independently an integer from 0 to 3.
  • Ar represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group.
  • R 1 to R 4 represent each independently an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a silyl group, or a heterocyclic group. If m, n, p, and q are 2 or greater, respectively adjacent ones of the plurality of R 1 to R 4 [groups] may be linked to each other to form a cyclic structure.
  • X, Y, and Z represent a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom, either Z or Y is a nitrogen atom, and when Y is a nitrogen atom, X is a carbon atom. It is preferable for Z to be a carbon atom, for Y to be a nitrogen atom, and for X to be a carbon atom.
  • m, n, p, and q represent each independently an integer from 0 to 3.
  • m is preferably from 0 to 2 and more preferably 0 or 1.
  • n is preferably from 0 to 2 and more preferably 0 or 1.
  • p is preferably from 0 to 2 and more preferably 0 or 1.
  • q is preferably from 0 to 2 and more preferably 0 or 1.
  • R 1 to R 4 represent each independently an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a silyl group, or a heterocyclic group.
  • the aforementioned alkyl group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C 1 to C 20 alkyl group and may have a linear, branched, or cyclic structure.
  • the aforementioned alkyl group is preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, concrete examples of which include a methyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, an octyl group, a decyl group, and a dodecyl group.
  • the aforementioned aryl group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C 6 to C 10 aryl group and may be condensed into a ring, examples of which include a phenyl group, a toluyl group, and a naphthyl group.
  • the aforementioned alkoxy group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C 1 to C 20 alkoxy group and may have a linear, branched, or cyclic structure.
  • the aforementioned alkoxy group is preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, concrete examples of which include a methoxy group, an octyloxy group, a decyloxy group, a dodecyloxy group, an s-octyloxy group, and a benzyloxy group.
  • the aforementioned aryloxy group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C 6 to C 10 aryloxy group and may be condensed into a ring, examples of which include a phenyloxy group, a toluyloxy group, and a naphthyloxy group.
  • the aforementioned silyl group represents a silyl group which has been substituted with a C 3 to C 24 hydrocarbon group and may be a trialkylsilyl group, an aryldialkylsilyl group, an alkyldiarylsilyl group, or a triarylsilyl group.
  • the aforementioned silyl group is preferably with a carbon number of 3 to 18, concrete examples of which include a trimethylsilyl group, a t-butyldimethylsilyl group, a triphenylsilyl group, and a t-butyldiphenylsilyl group.
  • Examples of the aforementioned heterocyclic group include a pyridine ring, a pyrimidine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyridazine ring, a triazine ring, an imidazole ring, a pyrazole ring, an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a triazole ring, an oxadiazole ring, a thiadiazole ring, a thiophen ring, and a furan ring.
  • a linear alkyl group or, in the case of a group other than an alkyl group, having an alkyl group as a substituent is preferable.
  • R 1 and R 2 are [each] preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, a fluorine atom, a cyano group, or a silyl group, and more preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • R 3 and R 4 are [each] preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group, more preferably a methyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, or a phenyl group, and even more preferably a methyl group or a trifluoromethyl group.
  • Examples of the aryl group represented by Ar include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group, with a phenyl group being preferable.
  • the aryl group represented by Ar may further have a substituent, and examples of this substituent include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a cyano group, an amino group, a fluorine atom, and a fluoroalkyl group, with a C 1 to C 6 alkyl group, a cyano group, an amino group, a fluorine atom, or a fluoroalkyl group (preferably a trifluoromethyl group) being preferable, and a C 1 to C 6 alkyl group or a fluorine atom being more preferable.
  • Ar is preferably a phenyl group having a substituent, and this substituent is preferably a methyl group, a t-butyl group, or a 4-methyl-cyclohexyl group.
  • n, p, and q are 2 or greater, respectively adjacent ones of the plurality of R 1 to R 4 [groups] may be linked to each other to form a cyclic structure.
  • One of the more preferred modes of the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-2 is a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-6 below:
  • X, Y, and Z represent each independently a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom. However, either Z or Y is a nitrogen atom.
  • Y is a nitrogen atom
  • X is a carbon atom.
  • r, s, t, and u represent each independently an integer from 0 to 3.
  • R 5 to R 8 represent each independently an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a silyl group, or a heterocyclic group.
  • W 1 and W 2 represent each independently an alkyl group and may bond to each other to form a cyclic structure.
  • X, Y, and Z are defined the same as X, Y, and Z in General Formula C-5-1, and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • R 5 to R 8 are defined the same as R 1 to R 4 in General Formula C-5-1.
  • R 5 and R 6 are preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group.
  • the alkyl group represented by R 5 and R 6 may have a substituent and is preferably a methyl group, a butyl group, an octyl group, a decyl group, a dodecyl group, or the like.
  • the alkoxy group represented by R 5 and R 6 is preferably a decyloxy group.
  • the aryl group represented by R 5 and R 6 is preferably a phenyl group that may have a substituent, and this substituent is preferably an alkyl group and more preferably a propyl group or a butyl group.
  • R 7 and R 8 are preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • r, s, t, and u represent each independently an integer from 0 to 3.
  • r is preferably from 0 to 2 and more preferably 0 or 1.
  • s is preferably from 0 to 2 and more preferably 0 or 1.
  • t is preferably 0 or 1
  • u is preferably 0 or 1.
  • r, s, t, and u are 2 or greater, respectively adjacent ones of the plurality of R 5 to R 8 [groups] may be linked to each other to form a cyclic structure.
  • this cyclic structure include structures in which a benzene ring, a benzofuran ring, a six-membered ring having Z, a fluorene ring, or the like is formed.
  • W 1 and W 2 represent a C 1 to C 10 alkyl group and may bond to each other to form a cyclic structure.
  • Examples of the alkyl group represented by W 1 and W 2 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an n-butyl group, and a pentyl group, with a methyl group being preferable.
  • an example of the cyclic structure formed by the bonding of W 1 and W 2 is a cyclohexyl ring structure.
  • W 1 and W 2 are a methyl group or bond to each other to form a cyclohexyl ring structure.
  • Another one of the more preferred modes of the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-1 is a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-7 below:
  • L 61 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • a 61 represents a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
  • Z 61 and Z 62 represent each independently a nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocycle.
  • Z 63 represents a benzene ring or an aromatic heterocycle.
  • Q is an anionic acyclic ligand bound to platinum.
  • L 61 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and the preferred ranges are the same as those of L 1 in General Formula C-1 above.
  • a 61 represents a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom. From the standpoint of the stability of the complex and the standpoint of luminescent quantum yield of the complex, A 61 is preferably a carbon atom.
  • Z 61 and Z 62 are respectively defined the same as Z 21 and Z 22 in General Formula C-2 above, and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • Z 63 is defined the same as Z 23 in General Formula C-2 above, and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • Q is an anionic acyclic ligand bound to platinum.
  • An acyclic ligand is one in which the atom bound to platinum does not form a ring in a ligand state.
  • the atom in Q that is bound to platinum is preferably a carbon atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, or a sulfur atom, more preferably a nitrogen atom or an oxygen atom, and most preferably an oxygen atom.
  • a vinyl ligand is an example of Q that is bound to platinum by a carbon atom.
  • Q bound to platinum by a nitrogen atom include an amino ligand and an imino ligand.
  • Q bound to platinum by an oxygen atom include an alkoxy ligand, an aryloxy ligand, a heteroaryloxy ligand, an acyloxy ligand, a silyloxy ligand, a carboxyl ligand, a phosphate ligand, and a sulfonate ligand.
  • Q bound to platinum by a sulfur atom include an alkylmercapto ligand, an arylmercapto ligand, a heteroarylmercapto ligand, and a thiocarboxylate ligand.
  • the ligand represented by Q may have a substituent. Those listed as the aforementioned Substituent Group A can be used as the substituent as needed. In addition, the substituents may also be linked to each other.
  • the ligand represented by Q is preferably a ligand bound to platinum by an oxygen atom, more preferably an acyloxy ligand, an alkoxy ligand, an aryloxy ligand, a heteroaryloxy ligand, or a silyloxy ligand, and even more preferably an acyloxy ligand.
  • One of the more preferred modes of the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-7 is a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-8 below:
  • a 701 to A 710 represent each independently C—R or a nitrogen atom.
  • R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • L 71 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • Q is an anionic acyclic ligand bound to platinum.
  • L 71 is defined the same as L 61 in General Formula C-6 [sic] 7 above, and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • a 701 to A 710 are defined the same as A 401 to A 410 in General Formula C-4, and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • Y [sic] 8 is defined the same as that in General Formula C-6, and the preferred ranges are also the same. 7 Translator's note: apparent error in the original; “General Formula C-6” should be “General Formula C-7.” 8 Translator's note: there is no “Y” in this chemical formula.
  • Another preferred mode of the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-1 is a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-9 below:
  • a and B represent a cyclic structure; A represents an aromatic ring, while B represents an aromatic heterocycle. When either A or B forms a ring, the other may not form a ring.
  • R 13 to R 16 represent each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a silyl group, or a heterocyclic group, and [each pair of] R 14 and R 15 , and R 13 and R 16 may bond to each other to form a cyclic structure.
  • A represents an aromatic ring.
  • the aromatic ring include an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and an aromatic heterocycle, with an aromatic hydrocarbon ring being preferable.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon ring represented by A is preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring.
  • the aromatic heterocycle represented by A is preferably a pyridine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyrimidine ring, or a quinoline ring.
  • B represents an aromatic heterocycle.
  • the aromatic heterocycle represented by B is preferably a pyridine ring or a pyrimidine ring.
  • a and B is preferably A being a benzene ring and B being acyclic (not forming a ring), or A being a naphthalene ring and B being acyclic, and more preferably A being a benzene ring and B being a pyridine ring, or A being acyclic and B being a pyridine ring.
  • R 13 to R 16 represent [each independently] a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a silyl group, or a heterocyclic group, and [each pair of] R 14 and R 15 , and R 13 and R 16 may bond to each other to form a cyclic structure.
  • the aforementioned alkyl group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C 1 to C 20 alkyl group and may have a linear, branched, or cyclic structure.
  • the aforementioned alkyl group is preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, and examples include a methyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, an octyl group, a decyl group, and a dodecyl group.
  • the aforementioned aryl group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C 6 to C 10 aryl group and may be condensed into a ring, examples of which include a phenyl group, a tolyl group, and a naphthyl group.
  • the aforementioned silyl group represents a silyl group which has been substituted with a C 3 to C 24 carbon atom and may be a trialkylsilyl group, an aryldialkylsilyl group, an alkyldiarylsilyl group, or a triarylsilyl group.
  • the aforementioned silyl group is preferably with a carbon number of 3 to 18, with examples including a trimethylsilyl group, a t-butyldimethylsilyl group, a triphenylsilyl group, and a t-butyldiphenylsilyl group.
  • Examples of the aforementioned heterocyclic group include a pyridine ring, a pyrimidine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyridazine ring, a triazine ring, an imidazole ring, a pyrazole ring, an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a triazole ring, an oxadiazole ring, a thiadiazole ring, a thiophene ring, and a furan ring.
  • R 13 , R 14 , R 15 , and R 16 it is preferable for [each of these] to be a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group or for each [pair of] R 13 and R 16 , and R 14 and R 15 to be bonded to form an aromatic ring.
  • An example of this aromatic ring is a benzene ring.
  • This aromatic ring may further have a substituent, examples of which include an alkyl group (methyl group, butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, octyl group, and decyl group) and an alkoxy group (methoxy group, ethoxy group, butoxy group, etc.).
  • an aromatic ring in which R 13 and R 16 , and R 14 and R 15 are respectively bonded is preferable.
  • B may form an aromatic 6-membered heterocycle.
  • R 17 to R 26 represent each independently an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a silyl group, or a heterocyclic group, and [each pair of] R 17 and R 18 , R 18 and R 19 , R 19 and R 20 , R 21 and R 22 , R 22 and R 23 , R 23 and R 24 , and R 23 and R 26 may bond to each other to form a cyclic structure.
  • alkyl groups, aryl groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, cyano groups, silyl groups, or heterocyclic groups represented by R 17 to R 26 are the same as the examples of the respective groups expressed by R 13 to R 26 .
  • R 17 , R 20 , R 21 , and R 24 are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • R 18 , R 19 , R 22 , and R 23 are [each] preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, a cyano group, or a silyl group, more preferably an alkyl group or an alkoxy group, and even more preferably a decyloxy group or a dodecyloxy group.
  • R 25 and R 26 are preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a fluorine atom, or an aromatic ring in which R 25 and R 26 are bonded.
  • the aromatic six-membered heterocycle represented by B is preferably a pyridine ring or a pyrimidine ring, with a pyridine ring being more preferable.
  • This ring may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include an alkyl group (methyl group or butyl group) and an aryl group (phenyl group).
  • R 17 to R 26 are chain-form alkyl groups or groups other than an alkyl group, they preferably have an alkyl group as a substituent from the standpoint of aspect ratio.
  • the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-1 is preferably a platinum complex expressed by any of General Formula C-2, C-7, or C-9 and more preferably a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-2 or C-9.
  • the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-2 is preferably a platinum complex expressed by any of General Formula C-3, C-4, C-5, or C-6, more preferably a platinum complex expressed by any of General Formula C-3-1, C-5-1, or C-6, and especially preferably a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-5-1 or C-6.
  • platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-1 include the compounds described in [0143] to [0152], [0157], [0158], and [0162] to [0168] in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2005-310733, the compounds described in [0065] to [0083] in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2006-256999, the compounds described in [0065] to [0090] in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2006-93542, the compounds described in [0063] to [0071] in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2007-73891, the compounds described in [0079] to [0083] in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2007-324309, the compounds described in [0065] to [0090] in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2006-93542, the compounds described in [0055] to [0071] in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2007-96255, and the compounds described in [0043] to [0046] in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2006-313796.
  • Examples of the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-1 and other platinum complexes having an aspect ratio that is greater than 3 will be shown below.
  • the alkyl group and the alkyl group [sic] in the compounds shown as examples include linear alkyl groups, branched alkyl groups, and cycloalkyl groups, with a linear alkyl group being preferable.
  • the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-1 can be synthesized by various methods such as the method described in line 53 of the left-hand column to line 7 of the right-hand column on page 789, the method described in lines 18 to 38 of the left-hand column on page 790, or the method described in lines 19 to 30 of the right-hand column on page 790 in Journal of Organic Chemistry 53, 786, (1988), G. R. Newkome et al., or by a combination of these [methods], as well as by the method described in lines 26 to 35 of page 2752 in Chemische Berichte [ Chemical Reports ] 113, 2749 (1980), H. Lexy et al.
  • [the platinum complex] can be obtained by treating a ligand or a dissociate thereof and a metal compound in the presence or absence of a solvent (such as a halogen-based solvent, an alcohol-based solvent, an ether-based solvent, an ester-based solvent, a ketone-based solvent, a nitrile-based solvent, an amide-based solvent, a sulfone-based solvent, a sulfoxide-based solvent, or water) and in the presence or absence of a base (various inorganic or organic bases such as sodium methoxide, t-butoxy potassium, triethylamine, and potassium carbonate) at room temperature or below or under heating (in addition to normal heating, a method involving heating by microwaves is also effective).
  • a solvent such as a halogen-based solvent, an alcohol-based solvent, an ether-based solvent, an ester-based solvent, a ketone-based solvent, a nitrile-based solvent, an amide-based solvent
  • pyrene derivative Any conventionally known pyrene derivative can be used as the pyrene derivative, but it is preferable to use a compound expressed by General Formula P-1 (hereinafter also referred to as “compound P-1”) below:
  • R P 1 to R P 10 represent each independently a hydrogen atom, an aromatic hydrocarbon group that may have a substituent, an alkyl group that may have a substituent, a silyl group that may have a substituent, a heterocyclic group that may have a substituent, an alkylamino group that may have a substituent, or an arylamino group that may have a substituent, and at least one of R P 1 to R P 10 is a group other than a hydrogen atom.
  • R P 1 to R P 10 represent each independently a hydrogen atom, an aromatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, a silyl group which may have a substituent, a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, an alkylamino group which may have a substituent, or an arylamino group which may have a substituent. These may be bonded to each other and condensed into a ring. At least one of R P 1 to R P 10 is a group other than a hydrogen atom.
  • R P 1 to R P 10 are a group other than a hydrogen atom, such a plurality of groups other than a hydrogen atom may be the same or different. It is preferable for these to be the same in terms of ease of synthesis, but it is preferable for these to be different in terms of allowing tuning of the emission wavelength.
  • the groups other than a hydrogen atom in R P 1 to R P 10 are preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent or a silyl group which may have a substituent, with an aromatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent being especially preferable.
  • the groups other than a hydrogen atom in R P 1 to R P 10 are preferably an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an arylamino group which may have substituent, or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, and in terms of obtaining a longer emission wavelength, the groups other than a hydrogen atom in R P 1 , R P 3 to R P 6 , and R P 8 to R P 10 are preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent.
  • the aromatic hydrocarbon groups represented by R P 1 to R P 10 are preferably with a carbon number of 6 to 16, and these are not limited at all to being monocyclic groups and may instead be condensed polycyclic hydrocarbon groups.
  • Concrete examples of aromatic hydrocarbon groups include a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a phenanthryl group, a naphthyl group, an anthryl group, and a fluorenyl group.
  • the alkyl groups represented by R P 1 to R P 10 are preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 10, and concrete examples include an i-propyl group, a t-butyl group, and a cyclohexyl group.
  • the silyl groups are preferably with a carbon number of 3 to 20, and concrete examples include a trimethylsilyl group, a dimethylphenylsilyl group, a dimethylbutylsilyl group, a triisopropylsilyl group, and a methyldibutylsilyl group.
  • the heterocyclic groups represented by R P 1 to R P 10 are preferably with a carbon number of 3 to 10, and concrete examples include a pyridyl group, a thienyl group, an oxazole group, an oxadiazole group, a benzothienyl group, a dibenzofuryl group, a dibenzothienyl group, a pyrazyl group, a pyrimidyl group, a pyrazoyl group, an imidazoyl group, and a phenylcarbazoyl group.
  • the alkylamino groups represented by R P 1 to R P 10 are preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 10, and concrete examples include a dimethylamino group, a diethylamino group, a dipropylamino group, and a dibutylamino group.
  • the arylamino groups represented by R P 1 to R P 10 are preferably with a carbon number of 6 to 30, and concrete examples include a diphenylamino group, a carbazoyl group, and a phenylnaphthylamino group.
  • substituents that these groups may have include an aryl group, an arylamino group, an alkyl group, a perfluoroalkyl group, a halide group, a carboxyl group, a cyano group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, a carbonyl group, an oxycarbonyl group, a carboxylic acid group, and a heterocyclic group.
  • Preferable examples include a C 6 to C 16 aryl group, a C 12 to C 30 arylamino group, a C 1 to C 12 alkyl group, a C 1 to C 12 perfluoroalkyl group, a fluoride group, a C 1 to C 10 oxycarbonyl group, a cyano group, a C 1 to C 10 alkoxy group, a C 6 to C 16 aryloxy group, a C 2 to C 16 carbonyl group, and a C 5 to C 20 heterocyclic group.
  • C 6 to C 16 aryl groups include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and a phenanthryl group.
  • Examples of C 12 to C 30 arylamino groups include a diphenylamino group, a carbazoyl group, and a phenylcarbazoyl group.
  • C 1 to C 12 alkyl groups include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a butyl group, an i-propyl group, a neopentyl group, and a t-butyl group.
  • An example of a C 1 to C 12 perfluoroalkyl group is a trifluoromethyl group.
  • Examples of a C 1 to C 10 oxycarbonyl group include a methoxycarbonyl group and an ethoxycarbonyl group.
  • Examples of a C 1 to C 10 alkoxy group include a methoxy group and an ethoxy group.
  • An example of a C 6 to C 16 aryloxy group is a phenyloxy group.
  • Examples of a C 2 to C 16 carbonyl group include an acetyl group and a phenylcarbonyl group.
  • Examples of a C 3 to C 20 heterocyclic group include a pyridyl group, a thienyl group, an oxazole group, an oxadiazole group, a benzothienyl group, a dibenzofuryl group, a dibenzothienyl group, a pyrazyl group, a pyrimidyl group, a pyrazoyl group, and an imidazoyl group.
  • R P 1 to R P 10 [groups] and the substituents which R P 1 to R P 10 may have, electron-donating groups such as an arylamino group or an alkoxy group and heterocyclic groups such as a thienyl group or a benzothienyl group contribute to increasing the emission wavelength of the compound P-1. Therefore, by selecting [one of] these substituents as R P 1 to R P 10 or the substituents which R P 1 to R P 10 may have, it is also possible to obtain a product that will emit green light.
  • R P 1 to R P 10 are defined the same as the R P 1 to R P 10 in General Formula P-1.
  • R P 1 and R P 2 , and R P 6 and R P 7 in General Formula P-1c, R P 1 and R P 10 , and R P 5 and R P 6 in General Formula P-1d, and R P 9 and R P 10 , and R P 4 and R P 5 in General Formula P-1e bond to each other to form a ring.
  • the rings formed here are preferably five- or six-membered rings.
  • R P 1 to R P 10 are defined the same as the R P 1 to R P 10 in General Formula P-1.
  • X represents a halogen atom.
  • perylene derivative Any conventionally known perylene derivative can be used as the perylene derivative, but it is preferable to use a compound expressed by General Formula PE-1 below:
  • R PE 1 to R PE 4 represent each independently an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an amino group, a silyl group, an ester group, an amido group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group, and these may further have a substituent. Moreover, these may bond to each other to form a ring.
  • n PE 1 to n PE 4 represent each independently an integer from 0 to 3.
  • the plurality of R PE 1 to R PE 4 [groups] may bond to each other to form a ring.
  • hydrogen atoms in the formula may be deuterium atoms.
  • R PE 1 to R PE 4 are preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an amino group, a silyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group and more preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an amino group, or a silyl group.
  • These groups may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the groups listed as the aforementioned Substituent Group A. If there are a plurality of substituents, these substituents may be linked to each other to form a ring.
  • n PE 1 to n PE 4 are preferably from 0 to 2, and 0 or 1 is more preferable.
  • the compound expressed by General Formula PE-1 is preferably a compound expressed by any of General Formulas PE-1a to PE-1f below.
  • the R N [groups] represent each independently an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an amino group, a silyl group, an ester group, an amido group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group. These may further have a substituent.
  • the R pe [groups] in General Formulas PE-1d to PE-1f may form each independently a five- or six-membered ring, and this ring may further have a substituent.
  • hydrogen atoms in General Formulas PE-1a to PE-1f may be deuterium atoms.
  • R pe is preferably an alkyl group (methyl group, propyl group, butyl group, etc.), an aryl group (phenyl group, naphthyl group, etc.), a heterocyclic group (pyridyl group, etc.), an amino group, a silyl group, or an amide group.
  • R pe and the ring formed by R pe may have include an alkyl group (methyl group, butyl group, etc.) and an aryl group (phenyl group, etc.).
  • R pe [groups] are defined the same as the R PE 1 to R PE 4 [groups] in General Formula PE-1.
  • X represents a halogen atom.
  • the ⁇ -conjugated compounds expressed by General Formula R-1 will now be described. These compounds are charge transporting amine-based ⁇ -conjugated compounds that do not exhibit a distinct melting point, have a glass transition point of 60° C. or higher, and have a molecular weight in the range of 400 to 2500, and the ratio (L/D) of the length (L) and diameter (D) of the smallest diameter cylinder inscribed by the ⁇ -conjugated compound is 2.5 or more.
  • Ar 1 to Ar 3 represent each independently a divalent C 6 to C 30 aromatic hydrocarbon group
  • Ar 4 to Ar 7 represent each independently a C 6 to C 30 aromatic hydrocarbon group
  • the two aromatic hydrocarbon groups that make up Ar 4 and Ar 5 may bond via a direct bond or via a substituent to form a condensed heterocycle with the nitrogen atoms which Ar 4 and Ar 5 replace
  • the two aromatic hydrocarbon groups that make up Ar 6 and Ar 7 may bond via a direct bond or via a substituent to form a condensed heterocycle with the nitrogen atoms which Ar 6 and Ar 7 replace.
  • L 1 and L 2 represent each independently a vinylene group or an acetylene group.
  • l, m, n, o, and p represent each independently an integer from 0 to 6, but one of l, n, and p is not 0.
  • ⁇ -conjugated compounds expressed by General Formula R-1 are the ⁇ -conjugated compounds expressed by General Formula R-2 or R-3 below:
  • Ar 1 to Ar 3 , L 1 , L 2 , and l to p mean the same as in General Formula R-1.
  • the R 5 [groups] represent each independently a substituent.
  • the q [groups] represent each independently an integer from 0 to 5.
  • Ar 2 means the same as in General Formula R-1.
  • the R 5 [groups] represent each independently a substituent.
  • the q [groups] represent each independently an integer from 0 to 5.
  • the ⁇ -conjugated compounds expressed by General Formula R-1 above are charge transporting amine-based ⁇ -conjugated compounds that do not exhibit a distinct melting point, have a glass transition point of 60° C. or higher, and have a molecular weight in the range of 400 to 2500. Furthermore, the ratio (L/D) of the length (L) and diameter (D) of the smallest diameter cylinder inscribed by this ⁇ -conjugated compound is 2.5 or more.
  • L/D is a numerical value that defines the length of the molecule of the ⁇ -conjugated compound; the larger the value, the longer [the molecule].
  • the orientation control has a greater effect with a slender molecule. Therefore, L/D is preferably within a range of 3 to 10.
  • the amine-based ⁇ -conjugated compound is preferably a compound having an amino group or an N-heterocyclic group at the end of the compound skeleton (the aromatic ring-containing skeleton).
  • the compounds expressed by General Formula R-1 include compounds expressed by General Formula R-2 and General Formula R-3.
  • the aforementioned amino group is preferably an aromatic amino group represented by —N(Ar) 2 (where Ar is an aromatic group).
  • the N-heterocyclic group is a cyclic amino group and is preferably an N-heterocyclic group such as an N-carbazolyl group, an N-phenoxazinyl group, or an N-phenothiazinyl group bonded at a nitrogen atom at the end of the compound skeleton.
  • Ar 1 to Ar 3 represent each independently a divalent C 6 to C 30 aromatic hydrocarbon group
  • Ar 4 to Ar 7 represent each independently a C 6 to C 30 aromatic hydrocarbon group
  • Ar 4 and Ar 5 , and Ar 6 and Ar 7 are such that the two aromatic hydrocarbon groups constituting Ar 4 and Ar 5 , and Ar 6 and Ar 7 may bond via a direct bond or via a substituent to form a condensed heterocycle with the N replaced by Ar 4 and Ar 5 , and Ar 6 and Ar 7 .
  • —NAr 6 Ar 7 or —NAr 6 and Ar 7 may form a cyclic amino group.
  • the condensed heterocycle here shall be understood to be a structure in which there is a heterocycle including an N in the center, and there is an aromatic hydrocarbon group condensed on both sides of this.
  • an N-carbazolyl group is an example, but a tricyclic compound is not the only option, and it may be tetracyclic or higher and may have a substituent.
  • L 1 and L 2 represent each independently a vinylene group or an acetylene group.
  • l, m, n, o, and p represent each independently an integer from 0 to 6, but one of l, n, and p is not 0.
  • the total of l, m, n, o, and p is preferably within a range of 2 to 10, and this is related to the aforementioned L/D [ratio].
  • l, m, n, o, or p is an integer greater than 6, the molecular weight of the ⁇ -conjugated compound will be [too] high, and this will make it more difficult to form a film by vapor deposition. Therefore, it is preferable for l, m, n, o, and p to be integers from 0 to 3 and for one of l, n, and p to be an integer that is not 0.
  • the aforementioned ⁇ -conjugated compound is preferably such that the ratio (L/D) of the diameter (D) and length (L) of the smallest diameter cylinder inscribed by the molecule of the ⁇ -conjugated compound is 2.5 or more.
  • L/D increases, the molecular weight of the ⁇ -conjugated compound is larger, which is undesirable because it is more difficult to form a film by vapor deposition.
  • This ratio is] preferably at least 2.5 and no more than 10.0 and especially preferably at least 2.5 and no more than 5.0.
  • Ar 1 to Ar 3 , L 1 , L 2 , and l to p have the same meanings as Ar 1 to Ar 3 , L 1 , L 2 , and l to p in General Formula R-1.
  • Ar 2 in General Formula R-3 means the same as Ar 2 in General Formula R-1.
  • R s [groups] represent each independently a substituent, and the groups listed as the aforementioned Substituent Group A can be used as needed as this substituent.
  • the substituent represented by R s is preferably an alkyl group.
  • the q [groups] represent each independently an integer from 0 to 5, preferably an integer from 0 to 3, and more preferably 0 or 1.
  • Ar 1 to Ar 3 are [each] a divalent hydrocarbon-based aromatic group produced by taking two hydrogens from a C 6 to C 30 hydrocarbon-based aromatic compound
  • Ar 4 to Ar 7 are [each] a monovalent hydrocarbon-based aromatic group produced by taking one hydrogen from a C 6 to C 30 hydrocarbon-based aromatic compound.
  • hydrocarbon-based aromatic compounds include benzene, biphenyl, and terphenyl, as well as naphthalene, anthracene, tetracene, phenanthrene, chrysene, coronene, fluorene, and other such condensed ring structures.
  • aromatic hydrocarbon compounds that give the aforementioned hydrocarbon-based aromatic group are shown below, but this list is not intended to be exhaustive.
  • the following examples are examples in which there is no substituent, but as long as the carbon number is within the range given above, there may be a substituent such as an alkyl group:
  • the aforementioned ⁇ -conjugated compound does not exhibit a distinct melting point and has a glass transition point of 60° C. or higher.
  • the Tg is preferably 60 to 300° C. It is undesirable for the Tg to exceed this temperature because this will entail a considerable burden on the equipment in order to control the substrate temperature during vapor deposition film formation, or sublimation of the ⁇ -conjugated compound formed on the substrate will occur.
  • the molecular weight of this ⁇ -conjugated compound is within the range of 400 to 2500 and preferably within the range of 400 to 1000. Forming a film by vapor deposition will be difficult if this molecular weight is exceeded.
  • the pyrene derivatives expressed by General Formulas P-1a to P-1d above and the ⁇ -conjugated compounds expressed by General Formula R-1 above are preferable as the fluorescent material in the present invention
  • the ⁇ -conjugated compounds expressed by General Formula R-1 above and pyrene derivatives with high symmetry, such as compounds 128, 129, and 133 to 179 given above, are more preferable, and the ⁇ -conjugated compounds listed in the concrete examples given above are especially preferable.
  • the aforementioned ⁇ -conjugated compounds and the aforementioned pyrene derivatives can realize a high degree of orientation (S).
  • the thickness of the light-emitting layer is preferably from 2 to 500 nm, and from the standpoint of external quantum efficiency, it is more preferably from 3 to 200 nm and even more preferably from 5 to 100 nm.
  • the light-emitting layer in the element of the present invention may be constituted solely from a light-emitting material or may also be made up of a mixed layer of a host material and a light-emitting material. There may be just one type of light-emitting material, or two or more types may be used.
  • the host material is preferably a charge transport material. There may be just one type of host material, or two or more types may be used, examples of which include a mixed configuration of an electron transporting host material and a hole transporting host material.
  • a material which does not have a charge transporting property and does not emit light may also be included in the light-emitting layer.
  • the light-emitting layer may be a single layer or a multilayer of two or more layers, and each of the light-emitting layers may also emit light of a different color.
  • a host material or the like other than the light-emitting material it is also preferable for a host material or the like other than the light-emitting material to be a planar material.
  • the amount of the light-emitting material contained in the light-emitting layer of the present invention is preferably 0.1 to 30 wt %, more preferably 1 to 25 wt %, and especially preferably 5 to 20 wt %.
  • the aforementioned light-emitting layer preferably further contains a host material.
  • the host material may be a hole transporting host material or an electron transporting host material, but a hole transporting host material can be used [sic].
  • the following compounds may be contained as the host material to be used in the present invention.
  • Examples include pyrrole, indole, carbazole (such as CBP(4,4′-di(9-carbazoyl)biphenyl)), azaindole, azacarbazole, triazole, oxazole, oxadiazole, pyrazole, imidazole, thiophene, polyarylalkane, pyrazoline, pyrazolone, phenylenediamine, arylamine, amino-substituted chalcone, styrylanthracene, fluorenone, hydrazone, stilbene, silazane, aromatic tertiary amine compounds, styrylamine compounds, porphyrin-based compounds, polysilane-based compounds, poly(N-vinylcarbazole), aniline-based copolymers, conductive macromolecular oligomers such as thiophene
  • the host material in the present invention is preferably a planar host material from the standpoint of the orientation of the light-emitting material, more preferably a triphenylene derivative or a carbazole compound such as those described later, and even more preferably a triphenylene derivative.
  • the lowest excited triplet energy (T 1 energy) of the aforementioned host material is preferable for the lowest excited triplet energy (T 1 energy) of the aforementioned host material to be higher than the T 1 energy of the aforementioned light-emitting material.
  • the amount of the host material contained in the light-emitting layer of the present invention is preferably at least 15 wt % and no more than 95 wt % with respect to the total weight of the compounds which form the light-emitting layer.
  • the compound expressed by General Formula 4-1 or 4-2 is preferably contained in the light-emitting layer in an amount of 30 to 99 wt %, more preferably 40 to 97 wt %, and especially preferably 50 to 95 wt %. Moreover, if a compound expressed by General Formula 4-1 or 4-2 is used in a plurality of organic layers, then it is preferably contained within the aforementioned range in each of those layers.
  • a compound expressed by General Formula 4-1 or 4-2 may be contained as a single type in any of the organic layers, or a combination of a plurality of compounds expressed by General Formula 4-1 or 4-2 may be contained in the desired ratio.
  • the aforementioned host material is preferably a compound expressed by General Formula 4-1 or 4-2 below:
  • R 8 represents a substituent, and if there are a plurality of R 8 [groups], the R 8 [groups] may be the same as or different from each other. In addition, at least one of the R 8 [groups] represents a carbazole group expressed by General Formula 5 below:)
  • R 9 [groups] represent each independently a substituent. g represents an integer from 0 to 8.
  • R 8 represent each independently a substituent, and in concrete terms, they are a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, or a substituent expressed by General Formula 5. If R 8 does not represent [a carbazole group expressed by] General Formula 5, it is preferably a C 10 or lower alkyl group or a substituted or unsubstituted C 10 or lower aryl group, with a C 6 or lower alkyl group being more preferable.
  • the R 9 [groups] represent each independently a substituent, and in concrete terms, they are a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group, preferably a C 10 or lower alkyl group or a C 10 or lower substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, and more preferably a C 6 or lower alkyl group.
  • g is an integer from 0 to 8, and from a standpoint of not excessively blocking the carbazole skeleton that handles charge transport, 0 to 4 is preferable. Furthermore, from the standpoint of ease of synthesis, if the carbazole has a substituent, it preferably has a substituent that is in symmetry with respect to the nitrogen atom.
  • the sum of d and e is preferably 2 or greater.
  • R 8 is preferably substituted in the meta [position] with respect to the other benzene ring. The reason for this is that with the ortho substitution, the bond is easily broken because of the high steric hindrance of the adjacent substituents, so durability suffers.
  • the molecular shape approaches a rigid rod shape, making it more likely that element degradation will occur under high temperature conditions because crystallization is more apt to occur.
  • the compound preferably is expressed by the following structure:
  • R 8 has the same meaning as R 8 in General Formula 4-1, and h and i are each independently 0 or 1 and preferably 0.
  • R 9 [groups] represent each independently a substituent.
  • g is an integer from 0 to 8.
  • R 9 and g are the same as those in General Formula 5 above.
  • f is preferably 2 or greater. If f is 2 or 3, the R 8 [groups] are preferably substituted in the meta [position] to each other, for the same reason.
  • the compound is preferably expressed by the following structure:
  • R 9 [groups] in the formula described above represent each independently a substituent.
  • g is an integer from 0 to 8.
  • R 9 and g are the same as those in General Formula 5 above.
  • isotopes of hydrogen such as a deuterium atom
  • isotopes of hydrogen are also included.
  • all of the hydrogen atoms in the compound may be replaced with hydrogen isotopes, or the compound may be a mixture in which just some of the hydrogens are hydrogen isotopes.
  • R 9 in General Formula 5 is replaced by deuterium, and the following structure is an especially preferable example:
  • Atoms further constituting a substituent also encompass isotopes thereof.
  • Compounds expressed by General Formulas 4-1 and 4-2 can be synthesized by combining various publicly known synthesis methods. Most commonly, for a carbazole compound, an example involves synthesis by dehydroaromatization following Aza-Cope rearrangement of a condensate of a cyclohexane derivative and aryl hydrazine ( Seimitsu Yuuki Gousei [Precision Organic Synthesis], by L. F. Tieze and Th. Eicher, translated by Takano and Ogasawara, p. 339 (published by Nankodo)).
  • the compounds expressed by General Formulas 4-1 and 4-2 in the present invention are preferably formed as a thin layer in a vacuum vapor deposition process, but a wet process such as solution coating can also be favorably used.
  • the molecular weight of the compound is preferably 2000 or lower, more preferably 1200 or lower, and especially preferably 800 or lower.
  • it is preferably 250 or higher and especially preferably 300 or higher because if the molecular weight is too low, the vapor pressure will be low, there will be no change from the vapor phase to the solid phase, and it will be difficult to form an organic layer.
  • General Formulas 4-1 and 4-2 are preferably compounds with the structures shown below or in which one or more of the hydrogen atoms have been replaced by deuterium atoms.
  • R 8 and R 9 in the above formula represent each independently a substituent.
  • triphenylene derivative is also favorable as the host material, and a triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-1 below (hereinafter sometimes referred to simply as a “triphenylene derivative”) is preferable.
  • triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-1 is composed solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms, it has excellent chemical stability, some benefits of which are better drive durability and lower probability that changes will occur during high luminance drive.
  • the molecular weight of the triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-1 is preferably within a range of 400 to 1200, more preferably 400 to 1000, and even more preferably 400 to 800. It is preferable for the molecular weight to be at least 400 because a good-quality amorphous thin film can be formed, and if the molecular weight is 1200 or lower, this is preferable in terms of solubility in solvents, sublimation [performance], and vapor deposition suitability.
  • triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-1 there are no limitations on the applications of the triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-1, and it may be contained not only in the light-emitting layer, but also in any of the organic layers.
  • R 12 to R 23 represent each independently a hydrogen atom; an alkyl group; a cyano group; a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group that may be substituted with an alkyl group, a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group; or a group that is a combination of these.
  • R 12 to R 23 will never be all hydrogen atoms.
  • Examples of the alkyl group represented by R 12 to R 23 include substituted or unsubstituted groups such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, a tert-butyl group, an n-octyl group, an n-decyl group, an n-hexadecyl group, a cyclopropyl group, a cyclopentyl group, and a cyclohexyl group, with a methyl group, an ethyl group, an isopropyl group, a tert-butyl group, or a cyclohexyl group being preferable, and a methyl group, an ethyl group, or a tert-butyl group being more preferable.
  • substituted or unsubstituted groups such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, an isopropyl group, an n
  • R 12 to R 23 are more preferably a C 1 to C 4 alkyl group; or a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group that may be substituted with a C 1 to C 4 alkyl group, a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group (these may be further substituted with an alkyl group, a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group).
  • a benzene ring which may be substituted with a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group (these may be further substituted with an alkyl group, a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group).
  • the total number of aryl rings in General Formula Tp-1 is preferably 2 to 8 and more preferably 3 to 5. Within this range, a good-quality amorphous thin-film can be formed, there will be good solubility in solvents, and sublimation performance and vapor deposition suitability will also be good.
  • R 12 to R 23 preferably have each independently a total carbon number of 20 to 50, and a total carbon number of 20 to 36 is more preferable. Within this range, a good-quality amorphous thin film can be formed, and solubility in solvents, sublimation [performance], and vapor deposition suitability will be favorable.
  • the triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-1 above is preferably a triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-2 below:
  • the plurality of Ar 1 [groups] are the same, and are [each] a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group that may be substituted with a cyano group, an alkyl group, a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group, or a group that is a combination of these.
  • the alkyl group or the phenyl group, fluorenyl group, naphthyl group, or triphenylenyl group that may be substituted with an alkyl group, a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group represented by Ar 1 is defined the same as what was listed for R 12 to R 23 , and preferred options are also the same.
  • the triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-1 above is preferably a triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-3 below:
  • L represents a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group that may be substituted with a cyano group, an alkyl group, a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group, or an n-valent linking group that is a combination of these.
  • n represents an integer from 1 to 6.
  • the alkyl group, phenyl group, fluorenyl group, naphthyl group, or triphenylenyl group forming an n-valent linking group represented by L is defined the same as what was listed for R 12 to R 23 .
  • L is preferably a benzene ring or a fluorene ring that may be substituted with an alkyl group or a benzene ring, or an n-valent linking group that is a combination of these.
  • n is preferably from 1 to 5 and more preferably from 1 to 4.
  • the triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-1 above is preferably a triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-4 below:
  • Ar 2 is preferably a group that is a combination of a C 1 to C 4 alkyl group, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and a triphenylenyl group, and more preferably a group that is a combination of a methyl group, a t-butyl group, a phenyl group, and a triphenylenyl group.
  • Ar 2 is especially preferable for Ar 2 to be a benzene ring substituted at the meta position with a C 1 to C 4 alkyl group, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, a triphenylenyl group, or a group that is a combination of these.
  • the triphenylene derivative according to the present invention is used as the host material of the light-emitting layer of an organoelectroluminescent element or as a charge transport material of a layer adjacent to the light-emitting layer, if there is a large energy gap from the light-emitting material in a thin film state (when the light-emitting material is a phosphorescent material, the lowest excited triplet (T 1 ) energy in a thin film state), this will prevent the emission from being quenched and is advantageous in terms of improving efficiency.
  • the energy gap and the T 1 energy it is preferable for the energy gap and the T 1 energy not to be too large.
  • the T 1 energy in a film state of the triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-1 is preferably at least 52 kcal/mol and no more than 80 kcal/mol, more preferably at least 55 kcal/mol and no more than 68 kcal/mol, and even more preferably at least 58 kcal/mol and no more than 63 kcal/mol.
  • Tp-1 When a phosphorescent material is used as a light-emitting material, in particular, it is preferable for the T 1 energy to be within the aforementioned range.
  • the T 1 energy can be found from the short wavelength end in measurement of the phosphorescence emission spectrum of a thin film of the material.
  • the material is formed into a film in a thickness of approximately 50 nm on a washed quartz glass substrate by a vacuum vapor deposition method, and an F-7000 Hitachi fluorescence spectrophotometer (Hitachi High-Technologies) is used to measure the phosphorescence emission spectrum of a thin film at liquid nitrogen temperature.
  • the T 1 energy can be found by converting the rising wavelength on the short wavelength side of the emission spectrum thus obtained into energy units.
  • triphenylene derivative according to the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited to or by these:
  • Sublimation purification not only allows organic impurities to be separated, but also allows inorganic salts, residual solvents, and the like to be effectively removed.
  • the triphenylene derivative is preferably contained in, besides the light-emitting layer, an organic layer that is adjacent to the light-emitting layer between the light-emitting layer and the cathode, but application of this is not limited, and [the triphenylene derivative] may further be contained in any of the organic layers.
  • the light-emitting layer, hole injection layer, hole transport layer, electron transport layer, electron injection layer, exciton blocking layer, charge blocking layer, or a plurality of these can be introduction layers that contain the triphenylene derivative according to the present invention.
  • the organic layer that contains the triphenylene derivative and is adjacent to the light-emitting layer between the cathode and the light-emitting layer is preferably a charge blocking layer or an electron transport layer, and more preferably a charge blocking layer.
  • Containing the triphenylene derivative in a layer adjacent to the light-emitting layer improves the durability and efficiency of the element.
  • the excitons tend to accumulate at the interface of the light-emitting layer and the adjacent layer, causing a phenomenon of breakdown of the adjacent layer, but because a triphenylene derivative has a structure with high durability, it is less susceptible to breakdown by excitons, which is believed to be why the aforementioned effect is obtained.
  • the triphenylene derivative is preferably composed of only carbon atoms and hydrogen atoms.
  • the triphenylene derivative is contained in a layer other than the light-emitting layer, it is preferably contained in an amount of 70 to 100 wt %, and more preferably 85 to 100 wt %. If the triphenylene derivative is contained in the light-emitting layer, it is preferably contained in an amount of 0.1 to 99 wt %, more preferably 1 to 95 wt %, and even more preferably 10 to 95 wt %, with respect to the total weight of the light-emitting layer.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the triphenylene derivative according to the present invention is preferably at least 60° C. and no more than 400° C., more preferably at least 65° C. and no more than 300° C., and even more preferably at least 80° C. and no more than 180° C.
  • the host material is preferably a host material with high planarity (hereinafter also referred to as a “planar host compound”) because the regularity of the arrangement state will be higher, and in concrete terms, a compound having a shape in which the aspect ratio is 3 or more is more preferable.
  • planar host compound a host material with high planarity
  • the aspect ratio is the ratio of the molecular length and molecular thickness of the compound (molecular length/molecular thickness).
  • the aspect ratio of the host material used in the present invention is preferably 3 or more, and an aspect ratio of 3.5 or more is more preferable.
  • the molecular length and molecular thickness are defined the same as in the description of the light-emitting layer.
  • planar host compounds a compound that is in the form of a disk is preferable as the host material used in the light-emitting layer of the present invention, and a discotic liquid crystalline host compound corresponding to the following is more preferable:
  • a discotic liquid crystalline host compound forms a liquid crystal phase composed of disk-shaped molecules having high planarity.
  • Discotic liquid crystalline host compounds also include compounds having a structure in which linear alkyl groups, alkoxy groups, or substituted benzoyloxy groups are substituted radially as side chains of the mother nucleus at the molecular center.
  • the compound is preferably one in which the molecule or cluster of molecules has rotational symmetry, and a specific orientation can be imparted.
  • the discotic liquid crystalline host compound is preferably selected from among triphenylene derivatives, pyrene derivatives, triazine derivatives, and carbazole derivatives, and more preferably selected from among triphenylene derivatives, pyrene derivatives, and triazine derivatives, and is most preferably a triphenylene derivative.
  • triphenylene derivative any conventionally known discotic liquid crystalline triphenylene derivative can be used as the triphenylene derivative that exhibits liquid crystallinity, but it may be, for example, a triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula T-I below:
  • R T means R T 1 —, R T 1 —O—, R T 1 —CO—O—, or R T 1 —O—CO—. Not all compounds having these groups are discotic liquid crystalline, but a suitable group that will result in discotic liquid crystallinity can be selected and used based on known art or the like. Examples of R T 1 include an alkyl group; an aryl group; a phenylene group, a cyclohexylene group, or another such ring that has been incorporated into an alkyl group; an oxygen atom disposed between a carbon-carbon of an alkyl group, and so forth.
  • examples of R T 2 include R T 2 —, R T 2 —O—, R T 2 —O—R T 3 —, R T 2 —O—R T 3 —O—, R T 2 —O-Ph-COO—, R T 2 —(O—R T 3 ) nT —O-Ph-COO—, R T 2 —O-Ph-CH ⁇ CH—COO—, and CH 2 ⁇ CH—COO—R T 3 —O-Ph-COO—.
  • R T 2 represents an alkyl group which may have a polymerizable group
  • R T 3 represents an alkylene group
  • Ph represents a phenylene group which may have a substituent
  • n T is the repeating number of —(O—R T 3 )— and represents an integer of 1 or greater.
  • R T 2 represents an alkyl group which may have a polymerizable group, and when it has a polymerizable group, having a polymerizable group at the very end of the alkyl group is preferable from the standpoint of the expression of an N D phase.
  • polymerizable groups include an acrylic acid ester group, a methacrylic acid ester group, a crotonic acid ester group, and an epoxy group, and in terms of the rate of polymerization and the cost and ease of synthesis, an acrylic acid ester group or a methacrylic acid ester group is preferable, with an acrylic acid ester group being more preferable.
  • the carbon number of the alkyl group portion in the alkyl group which may have a polymerizable group represented by R T 2 is preferably within a range of 1 to 20, more preferably a range of 1 to 15, and even more preferably a range of 3 to 10.
  • the carbon number of the alkylene group represented by R T3 is preferably within a range of 1 to 20, more preferably a range of 1 to 15, and even more preferably a range of 3 to 10.
  • Ph represents a phenylene group which may have a substituent
  • a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom
  • an alkyl group is preferable.
  • the carbon number of the alkyl group or alkoxy group serving as the substituent is preferably within a range of 1 to 20, more preferably a range of 1 to 10, and even more preferably a range of 1 to 6.
  • n T is the repeating number of —(O—R T 3 )— and represents an integer of l or greater. n T is preferably an integer from 1 to 10, more preferably an integer from 1 to 6, and even more preferably an integer from 1 to 3.
  • R T is preferably R T 2 —O-Ph-COO—, R T 2 —(O—R T 3 ) nT —O-Ph-COO—, or R T 2 —O-Ph-CH ⁇ CH—COO—, and more preferably R T 2 —O-Ph-COO—.
  • the triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula T-I above is preferably a triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula T-II below:
  • R T 1 represents R T 2 —O-Ph-CO—, R T 2 —(O—R T 3 ) nT —O-Ph-CO—, or R T 2 —O-Ph-CH ⁇ CH—CO—.
  • R T 2 , Ph, R T 3 , and n T are defined the same as R T 2 , Ph, R T 3 , and n T in General Formula T-I above.
  • concrete examples and preferred ranges of R T 2 , Ph, R T 3 , and n T in General Formula T-II above are also the same as those in General Formula T-I above.
  • R T ′ is expressed by one of General Formulas T-II-1 to T-II-5 below because the expression of an N D phase will be better:
  • n and n′ represent each independently an integer of 1 or greater.
  • X T represents a polymerizable group
  • n represents an integer of 1 or greater. n is preferably an integer from 1 to 20, more preferably an integer from 1 to 15, and even more preferably an integer from 3 to 10.
  • n′ represents an integer of 1 or greater. n′ is preferably an integer from 1 to 10, more preferably an integer from 1 to 6, and even more preferably an integer from 1 to 3.
  • X T represents a polymerizable group, and concrete examples and preferred ranges thereof are the same as the concrete examples and preferred ranges of the polymerizable group that may be possessed by the alkyl group represented by R T 2 in General Formula T-I above.
  • triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula T-I above is also preferable for the triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula T-III below:
  • R T means R T 1 —, R T 1 —O—, R T 1 —CO—O—, or R T 1 —O—CO—.
  • R T 1 include an alkyl group; an aryl group; a phenylene group, a cyclohexylene group, or another such ring that has been incorporated into an alkyl group; an oxygen atom disposed between a carbon-carbon of an alkyl group, and so forth.
  • Concrete examples and preferred ranges of R T are the same as the concrete examples and preferred ranges of R T in General Formula T-I above.
  • triphenylene derivatives that exhibit liquid crystallinity in the present invention those which manifest a liquid crystal phase between 20 and 300° C. are preferable. 40 to 280° C. is more preferable, and 60 to 250° C. is even more preferable.
  • the phrase “manifests a liquid crystal phase between 20 and 300° C.” encompasses a case in which the liquid crystal temperature range straddles 20° C. (such as 10 to 22° C.), as well as a case in which it straddles 300° C. (such as 298 to 310° C.). The same holds true of the 40 to 280° C. and the 60 to 250° C. ranges.
  • triphenylene derivatives that exhibit liquid crystallinity are given below, but the present invention is not limited to or by these:
  • the amount of the host material contained in the light-emitting layer of the present invention is preferably 15 to 97 wt %, more preferably 30 to 95 wt %, and even more preferably 50 to 95 wt % in the light-emitting layer.
  • the charge transport layer is a layer in which charge movement occurs when voltage is applied to the organoelectroluminescent element.
  • Concrete examples include a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, an electron blocking layer, a hole blocking layer, an electron transport layer, or an electron injection layer.
  • the hole injection layer and the hole transport layer are layers having the function of accepting holes from the anode or the anode side and transporting them to the cathode side.
  • a hole injection layer or a hole transport layer containing an electron-accepting dopant as the organic layer.
  • Examples of the materials used for the hole injection layer and the hole transport layer include publicly known materials such as 2-TNATA, TPD, NPD, DNTPD, and other such arylamine derivatives, CBP, mCP, ICTA, and other such carbazole derivatives, copper phthalocyanine, titanyl phthalocyanine, and other such phthalocyanine derivatives, alpha-4T, alpha-6T, and other such thiophene derivatives, fluorene derivatives, and quinoxaline derivatives.
  • Preferable are arylamine derivatives, phthalocyanine derivatives, quinoxaline derivatives, and carbazole derivatives, and more preferable are arylamine derivatives and quinoxaline derivatives.
  • the thickness of the hole injection layer is generally 5 to 200 nm, preferably 10 to 100 nm, and more preferably 10 to 80 nm.
  • the thickness of the hole transport layer is generally 5 to 200 nm, preferably 5 to 100 nm, and more preferably 5 to 80 nm.
  • the electron injection layer and the electron transport layer are layers having the function of accepting electrons from the cathode or the cathode side and transporting them to the anode side.
  • Examples of the material used for the electron injection layer and the electron transport layer include publicly known materials such as PBD, tertiary butyl PBD, and other such oxadiazole derivatives, imidazopyridine derivatives, triphenylene derivatives, azacarbazole derivatives, Bphen, BCP, and other such phenanthrene derivatives, and Alq 3 , Balq, and other such aluminum complexes, gallium complexes, zinc complexes, and other such metal complexes.
  • publicly known materials such as PBD, tertiary butyl PBD, and other such oxadiazole derivatives, imidazopyridine derivatives, triphenylene derivatives, azacarbazole derivatives, Bphen, BCP, and other such phenanthrene derivatives, and Alq 3 , Balq, and other such aluminum complexes, gallium complexes, zinc complexes, and other such metal complexes.
  • imidazopyridine derivatives Preferable are imidazopyridine derivatives, triphenylene derivatives, phenanthrene derivatives, aluminum complexes, gallium complexes, zinc complexes, and other such metal complexes, and more preferable are imidazopyridine derivatives, triphenylene derivatives, phenanthrene derivatives, and aluminum complexes.
  • the thickness of the electron injection layer is generally 5 to 100 nm, preferably 20 to 80 nm, and more preferably 25 to 60 nm.
  • the thickness of the electron transport layer is generally 1 to 100 nm, preferably 20 to 80 nm, and more preferably 25 to 60 nm.
  • the hole blocking layer is a layer having the function of preventing the holes transported from the anode side to the light-emitting layer from escaping to the cathode side.
  • a hole blocking layer can be provided as an organic layer that is adjacent to the light-emitting layer on the cathode side.
  • organic compounds that constitute a hole blocking layer include aluminum(III) bis(2-methyl-8-quinolinolate 11 ) 4-phenylphenolate (abbreviated as BAlq) and other such aluminum complexes, triazole derivatives, and phenanthroline derivatives such as 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline (abbreviated as BCP).
  • BAlq 4-phenylphenolate
  • BCP 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline
  • the thickness of the hole blocking layer is preferably 1 to 500 nm, more preferably 5 to 200 nm, and even more preferably 10 to 100 nm.
  • the hole blocking layer may have a single-layer structure composed of one or more types of the aforementioned materials, or it may have a multilayer structure composed of a plurality of layers of the same composition or different compositions.
  • the electron blocking layer is a layer having the function of preventing the electrons transported from the cathode side to the light-emitting layer from escaping to the anode side.
  • an electron blocking layer can be provided as an organic layer that is adjacent to the light-emitting layer on the anode side.
  • organic compounds that constitute an electron blocking layer those listed as [compounds for] the aforementioned hole transport layer can be used.
  • the thickness of the electron blocking layer is preferably 1 to 500 nm, more preferably 5 to 200 nm, and even more preferably 10 to 100 nm.
  • the electron blocking layer may have a single-layer structure composed of one or more types of the aforementioned materials, or may have a multilayer structure composed of a plurality of layers of the same composition or different compositions.
  • the first intermediate organic layer in the present invention is composed of at least one organic layer positioned between the anode and the light-emitting layer, and examples of this at least one organic layer include the aforementioned hole injection layer, hole transport layer, and electron blocking layer.
  • the first intermediate organic layer preferably includes at least one hole transport layer and is more preferably composed of a hole injection layer and a hole transport layer.
  • the thickness T1 of the first intermediate organic layer is generally 5 to 200 nm, preferably 10 to 150 nm, and more preferably 10 to 120 nm.
  • the second intermediate organic layer in the present invention is composed of at least one organic layer positioned between the cathode and the light-emitting layer, and examples of this at least one organic layer include the aforementioned hole blocking layer, electron transport layer, and electron injection layer.
  • the second intermediate organic layer preferably includes at least one electron transport layer and is more preferably composed of two electron transport layers or composed of an electron injection layer and an electron transport layer.
  • the thickness T2 of the second intermediate organic layer is greater than 20 nm and less than 80 nm, preferably greater than 20 nm and less than 80 nm [sic], and from the standpoint of power efficiency, it is more preferably at least 25 nm and less than 60 nm.
  • the relationship between the thickness T1 (nm) of the first intermediate organic layer and the thickness T2 (nm) of the second intermediate organic layer is such that 1.1 ⁇ T1/T2 ⁇ 4.0 and also such that 20 nm ⁇ T2 ⁇ 80 nm, but from the standpoints of external quantum efficiency and power efficiency, [this relationship] is preferably such that 1.2 ⁇ T1/T2 ⁇ 3.5 and also such that 20 nm ⁇ T2 ⁇ 80 nm, and more preferably such that 1.2 ⁇ T1/T2 ⁇ 3.0 and also such that 25 nm ⁇ T2 ⁇ 80 nm.
  • the relationship between the thickness T1 (nm) of the first intermediate organic layer and the thickness T2 (nm) of the second intermediate organic layer is preferably such that 1.2 ⁇ T1/T2 ⁇ 4.0 and also such that 30 nm ⁇ T2 ⁇ 80 nm. [This relationship] is more preferably such that 1.5 ⁇ T1/T2 ⁇ 3.5 and also such that 30 nm ⁇ T2 ⁇ 80 nm, and even more preferably such that 1.8 ⁇ T1/T2 ⁇ 3.0 and also such that 50 nm ⁇ T2 ⁇ 80 nm.
  • the aforementioned platinum complexes can be cited as examples of the light-emitting material in which the maximum emission wavelength is 600 to 700 nm.
  • the relationship between the thickness T1 (nm) of the first intermediate organic layer and the thickness T2 (nm) of the second intermediate organic layer is preferably such that 1.1 ⁇ T1/T2 ⁇ 3.0 and also such that 20 nm ⁇ T2 ⁇ 70 nm. [This relationship] is more preferably such that 1.2 ⁇ T1/T2 ⁇ 2.8 and also such that 25 nm ⁇ T2 ⁇ 60 nm, and even more preferably such that 1.2 ⁇ T1/T2 ⁇ 2.5 and also such that 30 nm ⁇ T2 ⁇ 50 nm.
  • pyrene derivatives and ⁇ -conjugated compounds can be cited as examples of the light-emitting material in which the maximum emission wavelength is 400 to 500 nm, with pyrene derivatives being preferable.
  • the maximum emission wavelength of the light-emitting material can be measured with an absolute quantum yield measurement device, a fluorescence spectrophotometer, or the like.
  • the entire organic EL element may be protected by a protective layer.
  • the element of the present invention may be entirely sealed by using a sealing container.
  • the organoelectroluminescent element of the present invention can emit light by applying direct current (may include an alternating current component as needed) voltage (usually 2 to 15 volts) or DC current between the anode and the cathode.
  • direct current may include an alternating current component as needed
  • voltage usually 2 to 15 volts
  • DC current between the anode and the cathode.
  • the light extraction efficiency of the light-emitting element of the present invention can be improved by a variety of publicly known methods.
  • the substrate surface shape can be machined (such as forming a fine texture pattern), the refractive index of the substrate, the ITO layer, and the organic layer can be controlled, the film thickness of the substrate and the ITO layer can be controlled, and so forth, all of which allows the light extraction efficiency to be improved and the external quantum efficiency and power efficiency to be raised.
  • the light-emitting element of the present invention is what is known as a top emission type, with which emitted light is extracted from the anode side.
  • the organic EL device of the present invention may have a resonator structure.
  • it may comprise a multilayer film mirror made up of a plurality of laminated films of different refractive indexes, a transparent or semi-transparent electrode, a light-emitting layer, and a metal electrode, all superposed on a transparent substrate.
  • the light generated by the light-emitting layer is repeatedly reflected and resonates, with the metal electrode and the multilayer mirror serving as reflector plates.
  • the transparent or semi-transparent electrode and the metal electrode each function as a reflector plate on a transparent substrate, and the light generated by the light-emitting layer is repeatedly reflected and resonates between these.
  • the optical path length which is determined from the effective refractive index of the two reflector plates and the thickness and refractive index of each of the layers between the reflector plates, is adjusted to an optimum value for obtaining the desired resonance wavelength.
  • the calculation formula in the case of the first mode is discussed in the Specification of Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application H9-180883.
  • the calculation formula in the case of the second mode is discussed in the Specification of Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2004-127795.
  • the external quantum efficiency of the organoelectroluminescent element of the present invention is preferably at least 5% and more preferably at least 7%.
  • the numerical value of the external quantum efficiency that can be used is the maximum value for external quantum efficiency when the element is driven at 20° C., or the value for external quantum efficiency near 100 to 300 cd/m 2 when the element is driven at 20° C.
  • the internal quantum efficiency of the organoelectroluminescent element of the present invention is preferably at least 30%, more preferably at least 50%, and even more preferably at least 70%.
  • the internal quantum efficiency of the element is calculated by dividing the external quantum efficiency by the light extraction efficiency.
  • the light extraction efficiency is approximately 20% with an ordinary organic EL element, but the light extraction efficiency can be raised to 20% or higher by modifying the shape of the substrate, the shape of the electrodes, the thickness of the organic layers, the thickness of the inorganic layers, the refractive index of the organic layers, the refractive index of the inorganic layers, and so forth.
  • the light-emitting element of the present invention can be utilized favorably in light emission devices, pixels, display elements, display devices, displays, backlights, electronic photography, illumination light sources, illumination devices, recording light sources, exposure light sources, reading light sources, road signs, trade signs, interior decorating, optical communications, and so forth. [This element] can be especially favorably used in devices that are driven in areas of high light emission brightness, such as in light emission devices, illumination devices, and display devices.
  • the light emission device of the present invention makes use of the aforementioned organoelectroluminescent element.
  • FIG. 2 is a sectional view schematically showing one example of the light emission device of the present invention.
  • the light emission device 20 in FIG. 2 is made up of a transparent substrate (supporting substrate) 2 , an organoelectroluminescent element 10 , a sealing container 16 , and the like.
  • the organoelectroluminescent element 10 is configured such that an anode (first electrode) 3 , an organic layer 11 , and a cathode (second electrode) 9 are sequentially laminated over the substrate 2 . Furthermore, a protective layer 12 is laminated over the cathode 9 , and in addition, the sealing container 16 is provided on the protective layer 12 via an adhesive layer 14 . Note that parts of the electrodes 3 and 9 , partitions, insulating layers, and so forth are not depicted.
  • an epoxy resin or other such photosetting adhesive or thermosetting adhesive can be used as the adhesive layer 14 .
  • a thermosetting adhesive sheet can also be used.
  • illumination devices include television sets, personal computers, portable telephones, electronic paper, and other such display devices.
  • FIG. 3 is a sectional view schematically showing one example of the illumination device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the illumination device 40 comprises the aforementioned organic EL element 10 and a light-scattering member 30 .
  • the illumination device 40 is configured such that the substrate 2 of the organic EL element 10 is in contact with the light-scattering member 30 .
  • the light-scattering member 30 is a member in which microparticles 32 are dispersed in a transparent substrate 31 .
  • a glass substrate for example, can be used favorably as the transparent substrate 31 .
  • Transparent resin microparticles can be used favorably as the microparticles 32 .
  • the glass substrate and the transparent resin microparticles can both be from prior art.
  • This type of illumination device 40 is devised such that when light emitted from the organoelectroluminescent element 10 is incident on a light incidence face 30 A of the light-scattering member 30 , the incident light is scattered by the light-scattering member 30 , and the scattered light exits a light emission face 30 B as illuminating light.
  • a washed quartz substrate was placed in a vapor deposition apparatus, and a film (light-emitting layer) was produced by co-depositing the host material and light-emitting material shown in Table 1 below at the light-emitting material doping concentration (weight concentration) shown in Table 1 below. This was termed Element B.
  • the film (light-emitting layer) formed as described above was measured for its ART-IR deflection angle to calculate the order parameter (degree of orientation (S)) of the light-emitting material in the light-emitting layer of Element A and Element B.
  • C9220-02 absolute PL quantum efficiency measurement apparatus made by Hamamatsu Photonics was used to measure the quantum yield of each element, thereby measuring the absolute PL (photoluminescence) quantum efficiency of the Elements A and B that were produced. [The results were] termed PL (A) and PL (B), respectively.
  • the PL (A) and PL s(B) thus obtained were used to calculate the PL (photoluminescence) retention as follows:
  • the optical wave component that vibrates in a direction perpendicular to the metal is quenched by the metal, and therefore not released from the film to the outside, so the quantum yield/PL retention decreases.
  • quenching decreases and PL retention increases (that is, the PL is maintained) when the light-emitting material is oriented.
  • a glass substrate (OA-10, made by Nippon Electric Glass Co., surface resistance of 10 ohms/square (also referred to as f/sq.), refractive index of 1.47) having an ITO film measuring 2.5 cm 2 and 0.5 mm thick was put into a washing vessel and ultrasonically washed in 2-propanol, after which it was subjected to treatment with UV-ozone for 30 minutes.
  • the following organic layers were sequentially deposited onto this transparent anode (ITO film) by a vacuum vapor deposition method:
  • First layer hole injection layer: HIL-1; film thickness of 10 nm
  • Third layer (light-emitting layer): E-1 and H-1 (weight ratio of 9:91); film thickness of 30 nm
  • Fourth layer (first electron transport layer): Balq; film thickness of 5 nm
  • Second electron transport layer Alq 3 ; film thickness of 30 nm
  • lithium fluoride was vapor-deposited in a thickness of 1 nm, followed by metallic aluminum in a thickness of 70 nm, which gave a cathode.
  • the lithium fluoride (1 nm) constitutes a layer located between the light-emitting layer and the cathode, but because it is an inorganic layer, it is not included in the thickness of the second intermediate organic layer of the present application.
  • This laminate was put in a glove box that had been replaced with nitrogen gas without coming into contact with the air, and was sealed using a glass sealing jar and a UV-setting adhesive (XNR5516HV, made by Nagase Chiba), which gave the element of Working Example 1.
  • the order parameter (degree of orientation (S)) of the light-emitting material in the light-emitting layer of the element in Working Example 1 was obtained by placing a washed quartz substrate in a vapor deposition apparatus, co-depositing the host material and the light-emitting material having the same materials and compositions as the aforementioned third layer (light-emitting layer) to produce a film (light-emitting layer), and measuring the ATR-IR deflection thereof to calculate the order parameter (degree of orientation (S)) of the light-emitting material in this film, and the value thus obtained was used.
  • the light-emitting material being oriented in the horizontal direction with the substrate was confirmed by the fact that the order parameter (degree of orientation (S)) of the light-emitting material calculated in this way was 0.7 or more.
  • a source measurement unit 2400 made by Toyo Technica DC voltage was applied to each element to cause it to emit light, and the brightness thereof was measured using a BM-8 brightness meter made by Topcon.
  • the emission wavelength and the emission spectrum were measured using a PMA-11 spectrum analyzer made by Hamamatsu Photonics. Based on these [results], the external quantum efficiency when the brightness was close to 500 cd/m 2 was calculated by a brightness conversion method.
  • a glass substrate (OA-10, made by Nippon Electric Glass Co., ITO layer thickness of 70 nm, refractive index of 1.47) having an ITO film measuring 2.5 cm 2 and 0.7 mm thick was put into a washing vessel and ultrasonically washed in 2-propanol, after which it was subjected to treatment with UV-ozone for 30 minutes.
  • the following organic layers were sequentially deposited onto this transparent anode (ITO film) by a vacuum vapor deposition method:
  • First layer hole injection layer: HIL-2; film thickness of 40 nm
  • Second layer (hole transport layer): HTL-2; film thickness of 10 nm
  • Third layer (light-emitting layer): BE-1 and H-3 (weight ratio of 5:95); film thickness of 30 nm
  • lithium fluoride was vapor-deposited in a thickness of 1 nm, followed by metallic aluminum in a thickness of 70 nm, which gave a cathode.
  • the lithium fluoride (1 nm) constitutes a layer located between the light-emitting layer and the cathode, but because it is an inorganic layer, it is not included in the thickness of the second intermediate organic layer of the present application.
  • This laminate was put in a glove box that had been replaced with nitrogen gas without coming into contact with the air, and was sealed using a glass sealing jar and a UV-setting adhesive (XNR55161HV, made by Nagase Chiba), which gave the element of Working Example 4-1.
  • a glass substrate (OA-10, made by Nippon Electric Glass Co., ITO layer thickness of 70 nm, substrate refractive index of 1.47) having an ITO film measuring 2.5 cm 2 and 0.7 mm thick was put into a washing vessel and ultrasonically washed in 2-propanol, after which it was subjected to treatment with UV-ozone for 30 minutes.
  • the following organic layers were sequentially deposited onto this transparent anode (ITO film) by a vacuum vapor deposition method:
  • First layer hole injection layer: HIL-2; film thickness of 40 nm
  • Second layer (hole transport layer): HTL-2; film thickness of 10 nm
  • Third layer (light-emitting layer): BE-1 and H-3 (weight ratio of 5:95); film thickness of 25 nm
  • lithium fluoride was vapor-deposited in a thickness of 1 nm, followed by metallic aluminum in a thickness of 70 nm, which gave a cathode.
  • the lithium fluoride (1 nm) constitutes a layer located between the light-emitting layer and the cathode, but because it is an inorganic layer, it is not included in the thickness of the second intermediate organic layer of the present application.
  • This laminate was put in a glove box that had been replaced with nitrogen gas without coming into contact with the air, and was sealed using a glass sealing jar and a UV-setting adhesive (XNR5516HV, made by Nagase Chiba), which gave the element of Working Example 8.
  • First layer hole injection layer: HIL-2; film thickness of 95 nm
  • Second layer (hole transport layer): HTL-2; film thickness of 30 nm
  • a glass substrate (OA-10, made by Nippon Electric Glass Co., ITO layer thickness of 70 nm, substrate refractive index of 1.47) having an ITO film measuring 2.5 cm 2 and 0.7 mm thick was put into a washing vessel and ultrasonically washed in 2-propanol, after which it was subjected to treatment with UV-ozone for 30 minutes.
  • the following organic layers were sequentially deposited onto this transparent anode (ITO film) by a vacuum vapor deposition method:
  • First layer hole injection layer: HIL-2; film thickness of 40 nm
  • Second layer (hole transport layer): HTL-2; film thickness of 10 nm
  • Third layer (light-emitting layer): BE-1 and H-3 (weight ratio of 5:95); film thickness of 40 nm
  • lithium fluoride was vapor-deposited in a thickness of 1 nm, followed by metallic aluminum in a thickness of 70 nm, which gave a cathode.
  • the lithium fluoride (1 nm) constitutes a layer located between the light-emitting layer and the cathode, but because it is an inorganic layer, it is not included in the thickness of the second intermediate organic layer of the present application.
  • This laminate was put in a glove box that had been replaced with nitrogen gas without coming into contact with the air, and was sealed using a glass sealing jar and a UV-setting adhesive (XNR5516HV, made by Nagase Chiba), which gave the element of Working Example 9.
  • First layer hole injection layer: HIL-2; film thickness of 95 nm
  • Second layer (hole transport layer): HTL-2; film thickness of 30 nm
  • a glass substrate (OA-10, made by Nippon Electric Glass Co., ITO layer thickness of 50 nm, substrate refractive index of 1.47) having an ITO film measuring 2.5 cm 2 and 0.7 mm thick was put into a washing vessel and ultrasonically washed in 2-propanol, after which it was subjected to treatment with UV-ozone for 30 minutes.
  • the following organic layers were sequentially deposited onto this transparent anode (ITO film) by a vacuum vapor deposition method:
  • First layer hole injection layer: HIL-2; film thickness of 40 nm
  • Second layer (hole transport layer): HTL-2; film thickness of 10 nm
  • Third layer (light-emitting layer): BE-3 and H-3 (weight ratio of 5:95); film thickness of 30 nm
  • lithium fluoride was vapor-deposited in a thickness of 1 nm, followed by metallic aluminum in a thickness of 70 nm, which gave a cathode.
  • the lithium fluoride (1 nm) constitutes a layer located between the light-emitting layer and the cathode, but because it is an inorganic layer, it is not included in the thickness of the second intermediate organic layer of the present application.
  • This laminate was put in a glove box that had been replaced with nitrogen gas without coming into contact with the air, and was sealed using a glass sealing jar and a UV-setting adhesive (XNR5516HV, made by Nagase Chiba), which gave the element of Working Example 10-1.
  • First layer hole injection layer: HIL-2; film thickness of 50 nm
  • Second layer (hole transport layer): HTL-2; film thickness of 15 nm
  • First layer hole injection layer: HIL-2; film thickness of 95 nm
  • Second layer (hole transport layer): HTL-2; film thickness of 30 nm
  • a substrate made of a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film with a thickness of 100 ⁇ m was coated with a coating solution for producing a reduced texture layer of the following composition, and [this coating] was dried to form a reduced texture layer with an average thickness of 20 ⁇ m.
  • PET polyethylene terephthalate
  • the average thickness of the reduced texture layer is an average value found by cutting out part of the reduced texture layer and measuring at 10 sites with a scanning electron microscope (S-3400N made by Hitachi High-Technologies) (the same applies to measurements below).
  • an intermediate layer with an average thickness of 1.6 ⁇ m was formed by coating the aforementioned reduced texture layer with an intermediate layer coating solution having the following composition:
  • microparticle layer with an average thickness of 10 ⁇ m was formed by coating the intermediate layer with a microparticle layer composition 1 prepared as follows and drying [this coating]:
  • microparticle dispersion 1 and 8 weight parts propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate were mixed at a temperature of 24° C. ( ⁇ 2° C.) and stirred for 10 minutes at 150 rpm.
  • a cover film made of polypropylene with a thickness of 12 ⁇ m was affixed over the produced microparticle layer, thereby producing a microparticle layer transfer material.
  • a glass substrate (OA-10, Nippon Electric Glass, with a refractive index of 1.47) was placed in a washing vessel and was ultrasonically washed in a neutral detergent, after which it was ultrasonically washed in pure water and then heated and dried for 120 minutes at 120° C.
  • a silane coupling solution (0.3 wt % aqueous solution of N- ⁇ (aminoethyl) ⁇ -aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, trade name KBM603, made by Shin-Etsu Chemical) was sprayed onto the aforementioned substrate by shower for 20 seconds, which was followed by washing with a pure water shower and heating and drying (2 hours at 80° C.).
  • the cover film was removed from the microparticle layer transfer material produced as described above, and the surface of the microparticle layer exposed after this removal was superposed over the surface of the aforementioned silane coupling-treated glass substrate such that the two surfaces were in contact, and a laminator was used to laminate the two at a rubber roller temperature of 130° C., a line pressure of 100N/cm, and a conveyance speed of 2.2 meters/minute over a substrate that had been heated for two minutes at 100° C.
  • a film of ITO indium tin oxide was formed by a sputtering method so as to obtain a thickness of 100 nm on the surface of the aforementioned high-refractive index glass substrate with an attached microparticle layer, on the side opposite from the microparticle layer.
  • An organoelectroluminescent element was produced, [with everything] from the vapor deposition of the first layer (hole injection layer) onward being carried out in the same manner as in Working Example 1.
  • An organoelectroluminescent element was produced in the same manner as in Working Example 11, except that the glass substrate described in Working Example 11 above was changed to SLH-53 (made by Ohara, with a refractive index of 1.81).
  • an organoelectroluminescent element which can satisfy both high external quantum efficiency and high power efficiency at the same time as well as a light emission device, display device, and illumination device in which such an organoelectroluminescent element is used.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Manufacturing & Machinery (AREA)
  • Electroluminescent Light Sources (AREA)
  • Devices For Indicating Variable Information By Combining Individual Elements (AREA)

Abstract

An organoelectroluminescent element which can satisfy both a high external quantum efficiency and high power efficiency at the same time, which has on a substrate an anode, a first intermediate organic layer composed of at least one organic layer, a light-emitting layer, a second intermediate organic layer composed of at least one organic layer, and a cathode in this order, and in which light is extracted from the aforementioned anode side, wherein the aforementioned light-emitting layer contains a light-emitting material that is oriented in the horizontal direction with the substrate, the order parameter of the aforementioned light-emitting material in the aforementioned light-emitting layer is at least 0.7, and the relationship between the thickness T1 (nm) of the aforementioned first intermediate organic layer and the thickness T2 (nm) of the aforementioned second intermediate organic layer is such that 1.1<T1/T2<4.0 and also such that 20 nm<T2<80 nm.

Description

    TECHNICAL FIELD
  • The present invention relates to an organoelectroluminescent element and to a light emission device, a display device, and an illumination device in which this organoelectroluminescent element is used.
  • BACKGROUND ART
  • Organoelectroluminescent elements are a self-emitting type of display device and are used in display and lighting applications. A display featuring an organoelectroluminescent element has advantageous display performance in that its visibility is better than that of conventional CRTs or LCDs, and that it has lower dependence on the viewing angle. Another advantage is that the display can be made more lightweight and thinner.
  • In addition to the advantages of light weight and thinness, an organoelectroluminescent element offers the potential to use a flexible substrate to achieve lighting in shapes that could not be obtained up to now.
  • The above are just some of the superior features of an organoelectroluminescent element, but the refractive index of the layers that make up an organoelectroluminescent element, including the light-emitting layer, is generally higher than that of air. For example, the refractive index of the light-emitting layer or another organic layer in an organoelectroluminescent element is from 1.6 to 2.1. Therefore, emitted light tends to be totally reflected at the interface, so the extraction efficiency thereof is less than 20%, with most of the light ending up being lost.
  • For example, a generally known organoelectroluminescent element is constituted by having an organic layer disposed between a pair of electrode layers on a substrate. This organic layer includes a light-emitting layer, and the organoelectroluminescent element emits light emitted from this light-emitting layer from the side of the light extraction face. In this case, because the entire reflection component (light at or above a critical angle) cannot be extracted at the interface between the organic layer and the electrode layer or the light extraction face, one problem is that the light extraction efficiency is low.
  • In order to solve such a problem, for example, a method has been proposed in which the light extraction efficiency is improved by using a light-emitting material that is oriented in the horizontal direction, in the light-emitting layer (Non-Patent Document 1).
  • In this proposal, however, the layer configuration other than the light-emitting layer has not been studied, and the external quantum efficiency needs to be further improved.
  • RELATED ART DOCUMENTS Non-Patent Documents
    • Non-Patent Document 1: Organic Electronics, Vol. 12, No. 5, 809-817 (2011)
    SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION Problems to be Solved by the Invention
  • The present invention was devised in light of the aforementioned problems encountered in the past, and it is an object thereof to achieve the following: namely, it is an object of the present invention to provide an organoelectroluminescent element in which the order parameter of the light-emitting material in the light-emitting layer is at least 0.7, and the light-emitting material is oriented in the horizontal direction with respect to the substrate, wherein a high external quantum efficiency and high power efficiency can both be satisfied at the same time, and to provide a light emission device, a display device, and an illumination device in which this organoelectroluminescent element is used.
  • Means for Solving the Problems
  • Means for solving the aforementioned problems are as follows:
  • (1)
  • An organoelectroluminescent element which has on a substrate an anode, a first intermediate organic layer composed of at least one organic layer, a light-emitting layer, a second intermediate organic layer composed of at least one organic layer, and a cathode in this order and in which light is extracted from the aforementioned anode side, wherein
  • the aforementioned light-emitting layer contains a light-emitting material that is oriented in the horizontal direction with the substrate, the order parameter of the aforementioned light-emitting material in the aforementioned light-emitting layer is at least 0.7, and
  • the relationship between the thickness T1 (nm) of the aforementioned first intermediate organic layer and the thickness T2 (nm) of the aforementioned second intermediate organic layer is such that 1.1<T1/T2<4.0 and also such that 20 nm<T2<80 nm.
  • (2)
  • The organoelectroluminescent element according to (1) above, wherein the aforementioned light-emitting material is a platinum complex, a pyrene derivative, or a π-conjugated compound expressed by General Formula R-11 below: 1 Translator's note: In the Japanese original document, the labeling number for each of the general formulas is indicated in parentheses, but we have omitted the parentheses in the translation to avoid confusion with other parenthetical notations.
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00001
  • (Where Ar1 to Ar3 represent each independently a divalent C6 to C30 aromatic hydrocarbon group, Ar4 to Ar7 represent each independently a C6 to C30 aromatic hydrocarbon group, the two aromatic hydrocarbon groups constituting Ar4 and Ar5 may bond via a direct bond or a substituent to form a condensed heterocycle with the N replaced by Ar4 and Ar5, and the two aromatic hydrocarbon groups constituting Ar6 and Ar7 may bond via a direct bond or a substituent to form a condensed heterocycle with the N replaced by Ar6 and Ar7; L1 and L2 represent each independently a vinylene group or an acetylene group; and l, m, n, o, and p represent each independently an integer from 0 to 6, but one of l, n, and p is not 0.)
  • (3)
  • The organoelectroluminescent element according to (1) or (2) above, wherein the aforementioned light-emitting layer further contains a host material, and this host material is a triphenylene derivative.
  • (4)
  • The organoelectroluminescent element according to any one of (1) to (3) above, wherein the maximum emission wavelength of the aforementioned light-emitting material is 600 to 700 nm, and the relationship between the thickness T1 (nm) of the aforementioned first intermediate organic layer and the thickness T2 (nm) of the aforementioned second intermediate organic layer is such that 1.2<T/T2<4.0 and also such that 30 nm<T2<80 nm.
  • (5)
  • The organoelectroluminescent element according to any one of (1) to (3) above, wherein the maximum emission wavelength of the aforementioned light-emitting material is 400 to 500 nm, and the relationship between the thickness T1 (nm) of the aforementioned first intermediate organic layer and the thickness T2 (nm) of the aforementioned second intermediate organic layer is such that 1.1<T1/T2<3.0 and also such that 20 nm<T2<70 nm.
  • (6)
  • The organoelectroluminescent element according to any one of (1) to (5) above, wherein a light extraction layer is formed on the aforementioned substrate.
  • (7)
  • The organoelectroluminescent element according to (6) above, wherein the refractive index of the aforementioned substrate is at least 1.8.
  • (8)
  • A light emission device in which the organoelectroluminescent element according to any one of (1) to (7) above is used.
  • (9)
  • A display device in which the organoelectroluminescent element according to any one of (1) to (7) above is used.
  • (10)
  • An illumination device in which the organoelectroluminescent element according to any one of (1) to (7) above is used.
  • Effects of the Invention
  • With the present invention, it is possible to provide an organoelectroluminescent element in which the order parameter of the light-emitting material in the light-emitting layer is at least 0.7, and the light-emitting material is oriented in the horizontal direction with respect to the substrate, wherein a high external quantum efficiency and high power efficiency can both be satisfied at the same time, and to provide a light emission device, a display device, and an illumination device in which this organoelectroluminescent element is used.
  • BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram showing one example of the configuration of the organoelectroluminescent element according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 2 is a schematic diagram showing one example of the light emission device according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram showing one example of the illumination device according to the present invention.
  • FIG. 4 is a model diagram for illustrating the molecular length of a material.
  • DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF EMBODIMENTS
  • The present invention will now be described in detail below. Note that “from . . . to . . . ” in this Specification indicates a range which includes the numerical values given as the minimum value and maximum value, respectively.
  • In the present invention, Substituent Group A and Substituent Group B are defined as follows:
  • (Substituent Group A)
  • Examples [of Substituent Group A] include alkyl groups (preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 10, such as a methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, tert-butyl, n-octyl, n-decyl, n-hexadecyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, and cyclohexyl); alkenyl groups (preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 10, such as a vinyl, allyl, 2-butenyl, and 3-pentenyl); alkynyl groups (preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 10, such as propargyl and 3-pentynyl); aryl groups (preferably with a carbon number of 6 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 6 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 6 to 12, such as phenyl, p-methylphenyl, naphthyl, and anthracenyl); amino groups (preferably with a carbon number of 0 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 0 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 0 to 10, such as amino, methylamino, dimethylamino, diethylamino, dibenzylamino, diphenylamino, and ditolylamino); alkoxy groups (preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 10, such as methoxy, ethoxy, butoxy, and 2-ethylhexyloxy); aryloxy groups (preferably with a carbon number of 6 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 6 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 6 to 12, such as phenyloxy, 1-naphthyloxy, and 2-naphthyloxy); heterocyclic oxy groups (preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, such as pyridyloxy, pyrazyloxy, pyrimidyloxy, and quinolyloxy); acyl groups (preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 12, such as acetyl, benzoyl, formyl, and pivaloyl); alkoxycarbonyl groups (preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 12, such as methoxycarbonyl and ethoxycarbonyl); aryloxycarbonyl groups (preferably with a carbon number of 7 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 7 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 7 to 12, such as phenyloxycarbonyl); acyloxy groups (preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 10, such as acetoxy and benzoyloxy); acylamino groups (preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 10, such as acetylamino and benzoylamino); alkoxycarbonylamino groups (preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 12, such as methoxycarbonylamino); aryloxycarbonylamino groups (preferably with a carbon number of 7 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 7 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 7 to 12, such as phenyloxycarbonylamino); sulfonyl amino groups (preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, such as methanesulfonyl amino and benzenesulfonyl amino); sulfamoyl groups (preferably with a carbon number of 0 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 0 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 0 to 12, such as sulfamoyl, methylsulfamoyl, dimethylsulfamoyl, and phenylsulfamoyl); carbamoyl groups (preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, such as carbamoyl, methylcarbamoyl, diethylcarbamoyl, and phenylcarbamoyl); alkylthio groups (preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, such as methylthio and ethylthio); arylthio groups (preferably with a carbon number of 6 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 6 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 6 to 12, such as phenylthio); heterocyclic thio groups (preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, such as pyridylthio, 2-benzimidazolylthio, 2-benzoxazolylthio, and 2-benzothiazolylthio); sulfonyl groups (preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, such as mesyl and tosyl); sulfinyl groups (preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, such as methanesulfinyl and benzenesulfinyl); ureido groups (preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, such as ureido, methylureido, and phenylureido); phosphoric amide groups (preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, such as diethylphosphoramide and phenylphosphoramide); a hydroxy group; a mercapto group; halogen atoms (such as a fluorine atom, chlorine atom, bromine atom, and iodine atom); a cyano group; a sulfo group; a carboxyl group; a nitro group; a hydroxamic acid group; a sulfino group; a hydrazino group; an imino group; heterocyclic groups (also including aromatic heterocyclic groups, preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 30 and more preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, with examples of the hetero atom including a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a phosphorus atom, a silicon atom, a selenium atom, and a tellurium atom, and with concrete examples including pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidyl, pyridazinyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, quinolyl, furyl, thienyl, selenophenyl, tellurophenyl, piperidyl, piperidino, morpholino, pyrrolidyl, pyrrolidino, benzoxazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzothiazolyl, a carbazolyl group, azepinyl group, and silolyl group); silyl groups (preferably with a carbon number of 3 to 40, more preferably with a carbon number of 3 to 30, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 3 to 24, such as trimethylsilyl and triphenylsilyl); silyloxy groups (preferably with a carbon number of 3 to 40, more preferably with a carbon number of 3 to 30, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 3 to 24, such as trimethylsilyloxy and triphenylsilyloxy); and phosphoryl groups (such as a diphenylphosphoryl group and a dimethylphosphoryl group). These substituents may be further substituted, and examples of the further substituent include groups selected from the Substituent Group A described above.
  • (Substituent Group B)
  • Examples [of Substituent Group B] include alkyl groups (preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 10, such as a methyl, ethyl, isopropyl, tert-butyl, n-octyl, n-decyl, n-hexadecyl, cyclopropyl, cyclopentyl, and cyclohexyl); alkenyl groups (preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 10, such as a vinyl, allyl, 2-butenyl, and 3-pentenyl); alkynyl groups (preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 10, such as propargyl and 3-pentynyl); aryl groups (preferably with a carbon number of 6 to 30, more preferably with a carbon number of 6 to 20, and especially preferably with a carbon number of 6 to 12, such as phenyl, p-methylphenyl, naphthyl, and anthracenyl); a cyano group; heterocyclic groups (also including aromatic heterocyclic groups, preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 30 and more preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, with examples of the hetero atom including a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, a phosphorus atom, a silicon atom, a selenium atom, and a tellurium atom, and with concrete examples including pyridyl, pyrazinyl, pyrimidyl, pyridazinyl, pyrrolyl, pyrazolyl, triazolyl, imidazolyl, oxazolyl, thiazolyl, isoxazolyl, isothiazolyl, quinolyl, furyl, thienyl, selenophenyl, tellurophenyl, piperidyl, piperidino, morpholino, pyrrolidyl, pyrrolidino, benzoxazolyl, benzimidazolyl, benzothiazolyl, a carbazolyl group, azepinyl group, and silolyl group). These substituents may be further substituted, and examples of the further substituent include groups selected from the Substituent Group A2 described above. 2 Translator's note: “Substituent Group B” is probably intended in the original rather than “Substituent Group A.”
  • Organoelectroluminescent Element
  • The organoelectroluminescent element of the present invention is an organoelectroluminescent element which has on a substrate an anode, a first intermediate organic layer composed of at least one organic layer, a light-emitting layer, a second intermediate organic layer composed of at least one organic layer, and a cathode in this order and in which light is extracted from the aforementioned anode side, wherein the aforementioned light-emitting layer contains a light-emitting material that is oriented in the horizontal direction with the substrate, the order parameter of the aforementioned light-emitting material in the aforementioned light-emitting layer is at least 0.7, and the relationship between the thickness T1 (nm) of the aforementioned first intermediate organic layer and the thickness T2 (nm) of the aforementioned second intermediate organic layer is such that 1.1<T1/T2<4.0 and also such that T2<80 nm [sic]3. 3 Translator's note: “20 nm<T2<80 nm” is probably intended in the original rather than “T2<80 nm.”
  • With the organoelectroluminescent element of the present invention, by setting the relationship between the thickness T1 (nm) of the aforementioned first intermediate organic layer and the thickness T2 (nm) of the aforementioned second intermediate organic layer such that 1.1<T/T2<4.0 and also such that 20 nm<T2<80 nm in an organoelectroluminescent element in which the order parameter of the light-emitting material in the light-emitting layer is at least 0.7, and the light-emitting material is oriented in the horizontal direction with the substrate, it is possible to satisfy both a high external quantum efficiency and high power efficiency at the same time.
  • With the iridium complexes or other such unoriented light-emitting materials that were not oriented in the horizontal direction with respect to the substrate in the light-emitting layer and that were widely used as light-emitting materials in conventional organoelectroluminescent elements, a large proportion of the emission is a component that undergoes quenching by metals, the light extraction efficiency to the outside decreases, and drive at a high voltage is necessary to raise the emission brightness, so these are undesirable from the standpoints of external quantum efficiency, power efficiency, durability, and so forth. Therefore, with a conventional element in which such an unoriented light-emitting material is used, the thickness of the organic layer between the light-emitting layer and the cathode (this corresponds to the thickness T2 (nm) of the aforementioned second intermediate organic layer) needed to be increased so as to reduce quenching by metals, and the thickness of the organic layer between this light-emitting layer and the cathode needed to be the same as or greater than the thickness of the organic layer between the light-emitting layer and the anode (this corresponds to the thickness T1 (nm) of the aforementioned first intermediate organic layer) (that is, satisfying the relationship T1≤T2), so a problem was divergence from the optimal distance due to optical interference. Furthermore, the carrier concentration was low, and electron mobility was low in the electron transport layer and electron injection layer; therefore, as the thickness of the electron transport layer and the electron injection layer increased, the drive voltage rose, which was a problem in that power efficiency suffered.
  • Investigation by the present inventors has revealed that, when a light-emitting material is used which is oriented in the horizontal direction with the substrate in the light-emitting layer and in which the order parameter is at least 0.7, the proportion of the emission of a component that undergoes quenching by metals is much lower than with an unoriented light-emitting material. The present invention is an organoelectroluminescent element that makes use of a light-emitting material that is oriented horizontally with respect to the substrate, wherein the thickness of the organic layer between the light-emitting layer and the anode (this corresponds to the thickness T1 (nm) of the aforementioned first intermediate organic layer) and the thickness of the organic layer between the light-emitting layer and the cathode (this corresponds to the thickness T2 (nm) of the aforementioned second intermediate organic layer) satisfy the relationship described above, the result of which is the discovery that it is possible to provide an organoelectroluminescent element in which the optimal length of optical interference can be achieved, and the thickness of the second intermediate organic layer (such as the electron injection layer or electron transport layer) can be reduced, so high external quantum efficiency and high power efficiency can both be satisfied at the same time.
  • Although the reason for this is not clear, it is surmised that when a light-emitting material that is oriented horizontally with respect to the substrate is used, the proportion of the emission of a component that undergoes quenching by metals is reduced significantly, which allows the distance between the cathode and the light-emitting layer to be reduced, and also that if the thickness of the organic layer between the light-emitting layer and the anode and the thickness of the organic layer between the light-emitting layer and the cathode satisfy the aforementioned relationship, the amplification effect of optical interference will be optimal.
  • Organoelectroluminescent Element
  • The organoelectroluminescent element of the present invention will now be described below.
  • The present invention provides an organoelectroluminescent element which has on a substrate an anode, a first intermediate organic layer composed of at least one organic layer, a light-emitting layer, a second intermediate organic layer composed of at least one organic layer, and a cathode in this order and in which light is extracted from the aforementioned anode side.
  • FIG. 1 shows an example of the configuration of the organoelectroluminescent element according to the present invention. The organoelectroluminescent element 10 according to the present invention shown in FIG. 1 is such that a light-emitting layer 6 is sandwiched between an anode 3 and a cathode 9 on a support substrate 2, and a light extraction layer 15 is formed on the side opposite from the side on which the anode 3 is formed. In concrete terms, a hole injection layer 4, a hole transport layer 5, the light-emitting layer 6, a first electron transport layer 7, and a second electron transport layer 8 are formed in this order between the anode 3 and the cathode 9.
  • In the configuration of the organoelectroluminescent element shown in FIG. 1, the first intermediate organic layer is composed of the hole injection layer 4 and the hole transport layer 5, and the thickness T1 of the first intermediate organic layer is the sum of the thickness of the hole injection layer 4 and the thickness of the hole transport layer 5. Similarly, the second intermediate organic layer is composed of the first electron transport layer 7 and the second electron transport layer 8, and the thickness T2 of the second intermediate organic layer is the sum of the thickness of the first electron transport layer 7 and the thickness of the second electron transport layer 8.
  • For the sake of the properties of a light-emitting element, the anode is preferably either transparent or semi-transparent.
  • <Layer Configuration of Organoelectroluminescent Element>
  • There are no particular restrictions on the configuration of the organic layers that are present in an organoelectroluminescent element as long as the aforementioned conditions are satisfied, which can be suitably selected according to the purpose and application of the organoelectroluminescent element. The organic layers are formed on the front face [sic]4 or one face of the aforementioned anode or the aforementioned cathode. 4 Translator's note: The word for “front face” here is probably an error in the original for “entire surface,” which happens to be homophonous in Japanese.
  • Concrete examples of the layer configuration are as follows, but the present invention is in no way limited to these configurations. Note that in the following layer configurations, the layers described between the anode and the light-emitting layer correspond to the first intermediate organic layer if they are organic layers, and the layers described between the light-emitting layer and the cathode correspond to the second intermediate organic layer.
  • anode/hole transport layer/light-emitting layer/electron transport layer/cathode
  • anode/hole transport layer/light-emitting layer/blocking layer/electron transport layer/cathode
  • anode/hole transport layer/light-emitting layer/blocking layer/electron transport layer/electron injection layer/cathode
  • anode/hole injection layer/hole transport layer/light-emitting layer/blocking layer/electron transport layer/cathode
  • anode/hole injection layer/hole transport layer/light-emitting layer/electron transport layer/cathode
  • anode/hole injection layer/hole transport layer/light-emitting layer/electron transport layer/electron injection layer/cathode
  • anode/hole injection layer/hole transport layer/light-emitting layer/first electron transport layer/second electron transport layer/cathode
  • anode/hole injection layer/hole transport layer/light-emitting layer/blocking layer/electron transport layer/electron injection layer/cathode
  • anode/hole injection layer/hole transport layer/blocking layer/light-emitting layer/blocking layer/electron transport layer/electron injection layer/cathode
  • <Substrate>
  • The substrate used in the present invention is preferably a substrate that will not scatter or attenuate light emitted from the organic layers. In the case of an organic material, one with excellent heat resistance, dimensional stability, solvent resistance, electrical insulation properties, and workability is preferable.
  • If a light extraction layer (described below) is formed on the substrate in the present invention, it is preferable to use glass with a high refractive index as the substrate in terms of further reducing guided light in the interior of the substrate and enhancing the external quantum efficiency and power efficiency, and it is more preferable if the refractive index of this glass with a high refractive index is at least 1.8. The refractive index of this glass with a high refractive index is ordinarily 2.0 or less.
  • The anode may be formed on the substrate such as a high-refractive-index glass so as to be in direct contact therewith or may also be formed via a light extraction layer (described below).
  • <Light Extraction Layer>
  • In the present invention, it is preferable for a light extraction layer to be formed on the substrate because the light extraction layer will reduce guided light inside the substrate and will increase the external quantum efficiency and the power efficiency. The light extraction layer formed on the substrate may be formed on the opposite side of the substrate from the side on which the anode is formed, or it may be formed at the interface between the substrate and the anode on the same side of the substrate as the side on which the anode is formed.
  • Examples of light extraction layers include a light scattering layer and a prism sheet. In concrete terms, a light scattering layer is a polymer layer composed of titanium dioxide, silica, or another such inorganic material, or polystyrene, PMMA, or another such organic material, and in which microparticles (from a few nanometers to a few microns in size) are dispersed, while a prism sheet is in the form of a triangular pyramid composed of an organic material formed by printing (such as screen printing), embossing, light patterning, nanoimprinting, or the like.
  • These layers can be formed directly on the substrate, or by forming them on a film and then transferring them to the substrate, or by bonding a film to the substrate, or another such method. Moreover, these layers may be formed either at the interface between the substrate and the air or at the interface between the substrate and a transparent electrode (the anode), or at both locations.
  • In addition, either a prism sheet or a light scattering layer may be used, or both may be used in combination.
  • The thickness of the light extraction layer is preferably 0.01 to 10 μm, more preferably 0.1 to 5 μm, and even more preferably 0.5 to 3 μm.
  • <Anode>
  • In general, there are no particular restrictions on the shape, structure, size, and so forth of the anode as long as it functions as an electrode that supplies holes to the organic layers and it can also extract the light generated at the light-emitting layer of the element from the anode side; one can be suitably selected from publicly known electrode materials depending on the purpose and application of the light-emitting element. As was discussed above, the anode is usually provided as a transparent or semi-transparent anode.
  • <Cathode>
  • In general, there are no particular restrictions on the shape, structure, size, and so forth of the cathode as long as it functions as an electrode that injects electrons into the organic layers, and one can be suitably selected from publicly known electrode materials depending on the purpose and application of the light-emitting element.
  • For the substrate, anode, and cathode, what is discussed in paragraph numbers [0070] to [0089] of Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2008-270736 can be applied to the present invention.
  • <Organic Layers>
  • The organic layers of the present invention will be described.
  • —Formation of Organic Layers—
  • In the organoelectroluminescent element of the present invention, each of the organic layers can be favorably formed by vapor deposition, sputtering, or another such dry film formation method, or by transfer, printing, spin coating, bar coating, ink jet, spray, or another such solution coating process. It is considered that the use of a liquid coating process leads to increased productivity and increased surface area of the organic EL element.
  • Dry methods that can be used include vapor deposition and sputtering, while wet methods that can be used include dipping, spin coating, dip coating, casting, die coating, roll coating, bar coating, gravure coating, spray coating, and inkjetting. The appropriate film formation method can be selected as dictated by the material of the organic layer. If the film is formed by a wet method, it may be dried afterward. The temperature, pressure, and other conditions in the drying are selected so as not to damage the coating layer.
  • The coating solution used in the aforementioned wet film formation methods (coating processes) is usually composed of the material of the organic layer and a solvent for dissolving or dispersing it. There are no particular restrictions on the solvent, which may be selected according to the material used for the organic layer.
  • When the material for the organoelectroluminescent element is used as a coating solution, the amount contained in the coating solution, based on total solids, is preferably 0.1 to 50 wt %, more preferably 0.3 to 40 wt %, and even more preferably 0.3 to 30 wt %. The viscosity is generally 1 to 30 mPa·s, more preferably 1.5 to 20 mPa·s, and even more preferably 1.5 to 15 m Pa·s.
  • The coating solution is preferably obtained by dissolving the organoelectroluminescent element material in a specified organic solvent, filtering the solution, and then using [the product] to coat a specified support or layer. The pore size of the filter used for filtration is 2.0 μm or less, more preferably 0.5 μm or less, and even more preferably 0.3 μm or less, and is preferably made of polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE), polyethylene, or nylon.
  • Examples of solvents include publicly known organic solvents such as aromatic hydrocarbon-based solvents, alcohol-based solvents, ketone-based solvents, aliphatic hydrocarbon-based solvents, and amide-based solvents.
  • Examples of aromatic hydrocarbon-based solvents include benzene, toluene, xylene, trimethylbenzene, tetramethylbenzene, cumene ethylbenzenen [sic]5, methyl propyl benzene, and methyl isopropyl benzene, with toluene, xylene, cumene, and trimethylbenzene being more preferable. The dielectric constant of an aromatic hydrocarbon-based solvent is usually 3 or lower. 5 Translator's note: apparent error in the original; “cumene ethylbenzenen” should be “cumene, ethylbenzenen” (as two separate terms).
  • Examples of alcohol-based solvents include methanol, ethanol, butanol, benzyl alcohol, and cyclohexanol, with butanol, benzyl alcohol, and cyclohexanol being more preferable. The dielectric constant of an alcohol-based solvent is usually 10 to 40.
  • Examples of ketone-based solvents include 1-octanone, 2-octanone, 1-nonanone, 2-nonanone, acetone, 4-heptanone, 1-hexanone, 2-hexanone, diisobutyl ketone, cyclohexanone, methyl cyclohexanone, phenyl acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, acetyl acetone, acetonyl acetone, ionone, diacetonyl alcohol, acetyl carbinol, acetophenone, methyl naphthyl ketone, isophorone, and propylene carbonate, with methyl ethyl ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, and propylene carbonate being preferable. The dielectric constant of a ketone-based solvent is usually 10 to 90.
  • Examples of aliphatic hydrocarbon-based solvents include pentane, hexane, octane, and decane, with octane and decane being preferable. The dielectric constant of an aliphatic hydrocarbon-based solvent is usually 1.5 to 2.0.
  • Examples of amide-based solvents include N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-ethyl-2-pyrrolidone, N,N-dimethylacetamide, N,N-dimethylformamide6, and 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone, with N-methyl-2-pyrrolidone and 1,3-dimethyl-2-imidazolidinone being preferable. The dielectric constant of an amide-based solvent is usually 30 to 40. 6 Translator's note: This chemical term appears garbled as a nonsensical word in the original Japanese document due to an apparent word processing error. We have ignored this obvious error and used a most likely intended chemical term in this translation.
  • The aforementioned solvents may be used alone, or two or more types may be used together.
  • Furthermore, a mixture of an aromatic hydrocarbon-based solvent (hereinafter, also referred to as “first solvent”) and a second solvent having a higher dielectric constant than the first solvent may be used.
  • An alcohol-based solvent, amide-based solvent, or ketone-based solvent is preferably used as the second solvent, and the use of an alcohol-based solvent is more preferable.
  • The mix ratio (by weight) of the first solvent and the second solvent is 1/99 to 99/1, preferably 10/90 to 90/10, and more preferably 20/80 to 70/30. A mixed solvent containing at least 60 wt % of the first solvent is preferable.
  • If the coating solution for forming the organic layer contains a compound having a polymerizable group, and the polymer that forms the organic layer is formed by the polymerization reaction of this compound having a polymerizable group, the polymerization reaction will be promoted in the formation of the polymer by heating or optical irradiation following the application of the organic film.
  • There are no particular restrictions on the heating temperature and duration after coating so long as the polymerization reaction proceeds, but the heating temperature is generally from 100 to 200° C., and preferably from 120 to 160° C. The heating time is generally from 1 to 120 minutes, preferably from 1 to 60 minutes, and more preferably from 1 to 30 minutes.
  • Further examples include a polymerization reaction under UV irradiation, a polymerization reaction with a platinum catalyst, and a polymerization reaction with an iron catalyst such as iron chloride. These polymerization methods may be used in combination with a polymerization method involving heating.
  • (Light-Emitting Layer)
  • <Light-Emitting Material>
  • The light-emitting material contained by the light-emitting layer in the present invention is oriented in the horizontal direction with the substrate in the light-emitting layer. In the present application, [the phrase] “the light-emitting material is oriented in the horizontal direction with the substrate” refers to a state in which the long-axis direction of the light-emitting material and the direction of the horizontal plane of the substrate substantially coincide, or in the case of a planar light-emitting material, a state in which the plane of the light-emitting material and the direction of the horizontal plane of the substrate substantially coincide. Whether the light-emitting material is oriented in the horizontal direction with the substrate can be confirmed by a method such as the deflection measurement of photoluminescence discussed, for example, in non-patent document titled ATR-IR Deflection Measurement (Applied Physics Letters, Vol. 96, 073302).
  • The order parameter of the light-emitting material in the light-emitting layer in the present invention is at least 0.7. With regard to the order parameter of the light-emitting material in the light-emitting layer, for example, a washed quartz substrate is put in a vapor deposition device, a film is produced by vapor-depositing a material containing the light-emitting material, and the order parameter of the light-emitting material can be calculated by the aforementioned deflection measurement of ATR-IR, deflection measurement of photoluminescence, or another such method. A state in which the order parameter measured by a method such as these is at least 0.7 refers to a state in which the long-axis direction of the light-emitting material in the light-emitting layer and the direction of the horizontal plane of the substrate substantially coincide, or in the case of a planar light-emitting material, a state in which the plane of the light-emitting material and the direction of the horizontal plane of the substrate substantially coincide (that is, a state in which “the light-emitting material is oriented in the horizontal direction with the substrate”), and this significantly reduces the proportion of the emission of a component that undergoes quenching by metals when the element is used for organic electroluminescence.
  • The order parameter of the light-emitting material in the light-emitting layer in the present invention is preferably at least 0.7 and no more than 1.0, and more preferably at least 0.8 and no more than 1.0.
  • Any light-emitting material publicly known in the past can be used as the light-emitting material in the present invention so long as it is oriented horizontally with the substrate in the light-emitting layer and the order parameter is at least 0.7, but from the standpoint of improving the orientation of the light-emitting material, the aspect ratio (molecular length/molecular thickness) is preferably greater than 3, more preferably greater than 5, and even more preferably greater than 5 and no more than 30, with 5.3 to 20 being especially favorable.
  • If the aforementioned aspect ratio is greater than 3, there will be little molecular fluctuation, and the decrease in orientation will be suppressed.
  • Note that in the present invention, the “molecular length” of the host material (described later) and the light-emitting material means the average values ((a+b)/2) of the lengths a and b of two sides of the closest quadrangle when the molecule of the material is imagined to have a flat structure as shown in FIG. 4. The term “closest quadrangle” here is defined as a quadrangle when the average values of a and b ((a+b)/2) are at their minimum out of a quadrangle (rectangle or square) that is tangent to the molecule on two sides. This “molecular length” is stipulated as follows by the theoretical calculation: Specifically, a density functional method is used, and in concrete terms, [this length is found] by using Gaussian 03 (from the US firm of Gaussian) to perform structural optimization computation with a basis function of 6-31G* and an exchange-correlation functional of B3LYP/LANL2DZ. The optimized structure obtained by structural optimization computation is used to define the molecular length as the average length of two sides of the closest quadrangle in ball-and-stick display.
  • The term “molecular thickness” means the thickness of the molecule in the Z axis direction, which is perpendicular to the X axis and the Y axis when we let the flat portions of the aforementioned flat structure be the X axis and Y axis (for example, the Y axis is the direction of the side with length a in FIG. 4, and the X axis is the direction of the side with length b). The molecular thickness is also found by the same method as that used for the molecular length, and the length in the thickness direction of the molecular in ball-and-stick display is defined as the molecular thickness.
  • Fluorescent materials and phosphorescent materials that satisfy the aforementioned conditions can be used as the light-emitting material, but a platinum complex (a phosphorescent material), a pyrene derivative (a fluorescent material), a perylene derivative (a fluorescent material), or a n-conjugated compound expressed by General Formula R-1 (described later) is preferable because it has a planar structure, and there is a greater likelihood that the aforementioned aspect ratio will be 3 or higher. A platinum complex (a phosphorescent material), a pyrene derivative (a fluorescent material), or a n-conjugated compound expressed by General Formula R-1 (described later) is more preferable from the standpoint of planarity.
  • Platinum Complex
  • The platinum complex is preferably platinum (a platinum complex) that is tetradentate, which is a planar coordination structure, and a platinum complex with a salen-based or porphyrin-based skeleton is more preferable.
  • The aforementioned platinum complex is preferably a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-1.
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00002
  • In the formula, Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 represent each independently a ligand coordinated to platinum. L1, L2, and L3 represent each independently a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • General Formula C-1 will now be described.
  • Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 represent each independently a ligand coordinated to platinum. The bonds between the platinum and Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 here may be covalent bonds, ion bonds, coordination bonds, or the like.
  • The atom in Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 that is bound to the platinum is preferably a carbon atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, a sulfur atom, or a phosphorus atom. Of the atoms in Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 that are bound to the platinum, at least one is preferably a carbon atom, more preferably two are carbon atoms, and it is especially preferable if two are carbon atoms and two are nitrogen atoms.
  • Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 bound to platinum by a carbon atom may be either an anionic ligand or a neutral ligand. Examples of anionic ligands include a vinyl ligand, an aromatic hydrocarbon ring ligand (such as a benzene ligand, a naphthalene ligand, an anthracene ligand, and a phenanthrene ligand), a heterocyclic ligand (such as a furan ligand, a thiophene ligand, a pyridine ligand, a pyrazine ligand, a pyrimidine ligand, a pyridazine ligand, a triazine ligand, a thiazole ligand, an oxazole ligand, a pyrrole ligand, an imidazole ligand, a pyrazole ligand, a triazole ligand, an oxadiazole ligand, a thiadiazole ligand, as well as condensed rings containing these [ligands] (such as a quinoline ligand or a benzothiazole ligand)). Examples of neutral ligands include a carbene ligand.
  • Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 bound to a platinum by a nitrogen atom may be either a neutral ligand or anionic ligand, and examples of neutral ligands include a nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocyclic ligand (such as a pyridine ligand, a pyrazine ligand, a pyrimidine ligand, a pyridazine ligand, a triazine ligand, an imidazole ligand, a pyrazole ligand, a triazole ligand, an oxazole ligand, a thiazole ligand, as well as condensed rings containing these [ligands] (such as a quinoline ligand or a benzimidazole ligand)), an amine ligand, a nitrile ligand, and an imine ligand. Examples of anionic ligands include an amino ligand, an imino ligand, a nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocyclic ligand (such as a pyrrole ligand, an imidazole ligand, a triazole ligand, as well as condensed rings containing these [ligands] (such as an indole ligand or a benzimidazole ligand)).
  • Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 bound to a platinum by an oxygen atom may be either a neutral ligand or anionic ligand, and examples of neutral ligands include an ether ligand, a ketone ligand, an ester ligand, an amido ligand, an oxygen-containing heterocyclic ligand (such as a furane ligand, an oxazole ligand, and condensed rings containing these [ligands] (such as a benzoxazole ligand)). Examples of anionic ligands include an alkoxy ligand, an aryloxy ligand, a heteroaryloxy ligand, an acyloxy ligand, and a silyloxy ligand.
  • Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 bound to a platinum by a sulfur atom may be either a neutral ligand or anionic ligand, and examples of neutral ligands include a thioether ligand, a thioketone ligand, a thioester ligand, a thioamido ligand, a sulfur-containing heterocyclic ligand (such as a thiophene ligand, a thiazole ligand, and condensed rings containing these [ligands] (such as a benzothiazole ligand)). Examples of anionic ligands include an alkylmercapto ligand, an arylmercapto ligand, and a heteroarylmercapto ligand.
  • Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 bound to a platinum by a phosphorus atom may be either a neutral ligand or anionic ligand, and examples of neutral ligands include a phosphine ligand, a phosphate ester ligand, a phosphite ester ligand, a phosphorus-containing heterocyclic ligand (such as a phosphinine ligand). Examples of anionic ligands include a phosphino ligand, a phosphinyl ligand, and a phosphoryl ligand.
  • The ligands represented by Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 may have a substituent, and those listed as the aforementioned Substituent Group A can be used as the substituent as needed. Moreover, the substituents may also be linked to each other. If substituents of Q3 and Q4 are linked to each other, the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-1 is a platinum complex of a cyclic tetradentate ligand.
  • The ligands represented by Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 are preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon ring ligand bound to platinum by a carbon atom, an aromatic heterocyclic ligand bound to platinum by a carbon atom, a nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocyclic ligand bound to platinum by a nitrogen atom, an acyloxy ligand, an alkoxy ligand, an aryloxy ligand, a heteroaryloxy ligand, or a silyloxy ligand, more preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon ring ligand bound to platinum by a carbon atom, an aromatic heterocyclic ligand bound to platinum by a carbon atom, a nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocyclic ligand bound to platinum by a nitrogen atom, an acyloxy ligand, or an aryloxy ligand, and even more preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon ring ligand bound to platinum by a carbon atom, an aromatic heterocyclic ligand bound to platinum by a carbon atom, a nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocyclic ligand bound to platinum by a nitrogen atom, or an acyloxy ligand.
  • L1, L2, and L3 represent a single bond, a double bond, a divalent linking group, or a group that is a combination of these. Examples of the divalent linking group represented by L1, L2, and L3 include alkylene groups (such as methylene, ethylene, and propylene), arylene groups (phenylene and naphthalenediyl), heteroarylene groups (such as pyridinediyl and thiophenediyl), imino groups (—NR—) (such as a phenylimino group), an oxy group (—O—), a thio group (—S—), phosphinidene groups (—PR—) (such as a phenylphosphinidene group), silylene groups (—SiRR′—) (such as a dimethylsilylene group and diphenylsilylene group), a carbonyl group, as well as combinations of these. These linking groups may further have a substituent. R and R′ represent each independently a substituent. The substituents listed as the aforementioned Substituent Group A can be used as these substituents. If there are a plurality of [each of] these substituents, the substituents may bond to each other to form a ring.
  • From the standpoints of the stability of the complex and luminescent quantum yield, L2 and L3 are preferably a single bond, an alkylene group, an arylene group, a heteroarylene group, an imino group, an oxy group, a thio group, or a silylene group, more preferably a single bond, an alkylene group, an arylene group, or an imino group, even more preferably a single bond, an alkylene group, or an arylene group, still more preferably a single bond, a methylene group, or a phenylene group, yet still more preferably a single bond or a methylene group in which two hydrogen atoms are substituted, especially preferably a single bond or a dimethylmethylene group, and most preferably a single bond.
  • L1 is preferably an alkylene group, an arylene group, a heteroarylene group, an imino group, an oxy group, a thio group, a silylene group, or a carbonyl group, more preferably an alkylene group, an arylene group, or an imino group, even more preferably an alkylene group or an imino group, especially preferably a methylene group or an imino group. These may have a substituent, and the substituents listed as the aforementioned Substituent Group A can be used as these substituents. If there are a plurality of [each of] these substituents, the substituents may bond to each other to form a ring.
  • L1 is more preferably a single bond, a methylene group in which two hydrogen atoms are substituted, or an arylimino group that may be substituted, even more preferably a dimethylmethylene group, an ethylmethylmethylene group, a methylpropylmethylene group, an isobutylmethylmethylene group, a cyclohexanediyl group, a cyclopentanediyl group, a fluoromethylmethylene group, or a phenylimino group, and especially preferably a dimethylmethylene group or a phenylimino group. If possible, these groups may further be substituted with a group [from those] listed in the aforementioned Substituent Group A.
  • An example of preferred modes of the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-1 is a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-2 below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00003
  • In the formula, L21 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. A21, A22, B21, and B22 represent each independently a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom. However, at least two of A21, A22, B21, and B22 represent a nitrogen atom. Z21, Z22, Z23, and Z24 represent each independently a benzene ring or a nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocycle.
  • General Formula C-2 will now be described.
  • L21 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and the preferred ranges are the same as those of L1 in General Formula C-1 above.
  • A21, A22, B21, and B22 represent each independently a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom, but at least two of these represent a nitrogen atom. In addition, it is preferable if two or three of A21, A22, B21, and B22 represent a nitrogen atom, and it is more preferable if two of these represent a nitrogen atom. From the standpoint of the stability of the complex, it is preferable for A21 and A22 to represent a nitrogen atom or for B21 and B22 to represent a nitrogen atom.
  • Z21, Z22, Z23, and Z24 represent each independently a benzene ring or a nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocycle.
  • Examples of the nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocycle represented by Z21, Z22, Z23, and Z24 include a pyridine ring, a pyrimidine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyridazine ring, a triazine ring, an imidazole ring, a pyrazole ring, an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a triazole ring, an oxadiazole ring, and a thiadiazole ring.
  • From the standpoints of orientation and the stability as the material for an organoelectroluminescent element, the ring represented by Z21 and Z22 is preferably a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, a pyrazine ring, an imidazole ring, or a pyrazole ring, and more preferably a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, or a pyrazole ring.
  • From the standpoints of the stability of the complex, control of emission wavelength, and luminescent quantum yield, the ring represented by Z23 and Z24 is preferably a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, a pyrazine ring, an imidazole ring, or a pyrazole ring, more preferably a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, or a pyrazole ring, and even more preferably a benzene ring or a pyridine ring.
  • The aforementioned benzene ring and nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocycle represented by Z2, Z2, Z23, and Z24 may have a substituent, and [a group from] the aforementioned Substituent Group A can be used as a substituent on a carbon atom, while [a group from] the aforementioned Substituent Group B can be used as a substituent on a nitrogen atom.
  • The substituent on a carbon atom is preferably an alkyl group, a fluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a dialkylamino group, a diarylamino group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a silyl group, a cyano group, or a halogen atom, more preferably an alkyl group, a fluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a heterocyclic group, a diarylamino group, an alkoxy group, a cyano group, or a halogen atom, and even more preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group.
  • The aforementioned alkyl group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C1 to C20 alkyl group and may have a linear, branched, or cyclic structure. The aforementioned alkyl group is preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, examples of which include a methyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, an octyl group, a decyl group, and a dodecyl group.
  • The aforementioned aryl group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C6 to C10 aryl group and may be condensed into a ring, examples of which include a phenyl group, a toluyl group, and a naphthyl group.
  • The aforementioned fluoroalkyl group is preferably a trifluoromethyl group.
  • The aforementioned alkoxy group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C1 to C20 alkoxy group and may have a linear, branched, or cyclic structure. The aforementioned alkoxy group is preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, examples of which include a methoxy group, a butyloxy group, an octyloxy group, a decyloxy group, a dodecyloxy group, an s-octyloxy group, and a benzyloxy group.
  • The aforementioned heterocyclic group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C6 to C10 nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocyclic group and may be condensed into a ring, examples of which include a pyridine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyrimidine ring, a pyridazine ring, a triazine ring, and a carbazole ring, with a carbazole ring being preferable.
  • The aforementioned diarylamino group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C6 to C10 diarylamino group and may be condensed into a ring, examples of which include a diphenylamino group, a ditoluylamino group, and a dinaphthylamino group.
  • The aforementioned dialkylamino group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C2 to C20 dialkylamino group and may have a linear, branched, or cyclic structure. The aforementioned dialkylamino group is preferably with a carbon number of 2 to 12, concrete examples of which include a dimethylamino group, a diethylamino group, a dioctylamino group, a didecylamino group, a didodecylamino group, a di-t-butylamino group, a di-t-amylamino group, and a di-s-butylamino group.
  • The aforementioned aryloxy group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C6 to C10 aryloxy group and may be condensed into a ring, examples of which include a phenyloxy group, a toluyloxy group, and a naphthyloxy group.
  • The aforementioned silyl group represents a silyl group which has been substituted with a C3 to C24 carbon atom and may be a trialkylsilyl group, an aryldialkylsilyl group, an alkyldiarylsilyl group, or a triarylsilyl group. The aforementioned silyl group is preferably with a carbon number of 3 to 18, concrete examples of which include a trimethylsilyl group, a t-butyldimethylsilyl group, a triphenylsilyl group, and a t-butyldiphenylsilyl group.
  • The halogen atom is preferably a fluorine atom.
  • Of these, a linear alkyl group or the aforementioned substituent having a linear alkyl group as a substituent is preferable from the standpoint of aspect ratio.
  • Substituents are appropriately selected for the purpose of controlling the emission wavelength and electric potential, but if the wavelength is to be lengthened, [the substituent is] preferably an electron-donating group or an aromatic ring group; for example, an alkyl group, a dialkylamino group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, or the like is selected. Furthermore, if the wavelength is to be shortened, [the substituent is] preferably an electron-withdrawing group; for example, a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a trifluoroalkyl group, or the like is selected.
  • An alkyl group, an aryl group, or an aromatic heterocyclic group is preferable as a substituent on a nitrogen atom, and from the standpoint of the stability of the complex, an alkyl group or an aryl group is preferable.
  • The substituents on Z21, Z22, Z23, and Z24 may be linked to each other to form a condensed ring, and examples of the ring thus formed include a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyridazine ring, a pyrimidine ring, an imidazole ring, an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a pyrazole ring, a thiophene ring, and a furan ring. When the substituents belonging to Z23 and Z24 link to each other, the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-2 is a platinum complex of cyclic tetradentate ligand.
  • One of the more preferred modes of the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-2 is a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-3 below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00004
  • In the formula, A301 to A313 represent each independently C—R or a nitrogen atom. R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. L31 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Y, Z, and M represent each independently a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom, and either Z or Y is a nitrogen atom.
  • General Formula C-3 will now be described.
  • L31 is defined the same as L21 in General Formula C-2, and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • A301 to A306 represent each independently C—R or a nitrogen atom. R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Substituents listed as the aforementioned Substituent Group A can be used as the substituent represented by R.
  • A301 to A306 are preferably C—R, and the R [groups] may be linked to each other to form a ring. If A301 to A306 are C—R, the R [groups] of A302 and A305 are preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a dialkylamino group, a diarylamino group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a silyl group, a cyano group, or a halogen atom, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a diarylamino group, an alkoxy group, a cyano group, or a halogen atom, even more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, or a cyano group, and especially preferably a hydrogen atom. These alkyl group and aryl group may further have a substituent, and examples of this substituent include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a cyano group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and a fluoroalkyl group, and are preferably a C1 to C6 alkyl group, a cyano group, an amino group, a halogen atom, and a fluoroalkyl group (preferably a trifluoromethyl group), more preferably a C1 to C6 alkyl group and a halogen atom (preferably a fluorine atom). If A302 and A305 are C—R, the R [groups] of these A302 and A305 are preferably an aryl group from the standpoint of improving durability of the element, and from the standpoint of short emission wavelength, a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an amino group, an alkoxy group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group is preferable.
  • The R [groups] of A301, A303, A304, and A306 are preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an amino group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an amino group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a fluorine atom, and especially preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • A307, A308, A309, and A310 represent each independently C—R or a nitrogen atom. R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Substituents listed as the aforementioned Substituent Group A can be used as the substituent represented by R. If A307, A308, A309, and A310 are C—R, the R [groups] are preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, a dialkylamino group, a diarylamino group, an alkyloxy group, a cyano group, or a halogen atom, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, a dialkylamino group, a cyano group, or a fluorine atom, and even more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, or a fluorine atom. Moreover, if possible, the substituents may be linked to each other to form a condensed ring structure. When the emission wavelength is shifted to the short wavelength side, it is preferable for A308 to be a nitrogen atom.
  • Examples of the six-membered ring formed from A307, A308, A309, and A310 and two carbon atoms in General Formula C-3 include a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyrimidine ring, a pyridazine ring, and a triazine ring, with a benzene ring, a pyridine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyrimidine ring, and a pyridazine ring being more preferable, and a benzene ring and a pyridine ring being especially favorable. In terms of being easier to form a metal complex, it is advantageous for the aforementioned six-membered ring to be a pyridine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyrimidine ring, or a pyridazine ring (with a pyridine ring being especially favorable) because the acidity of the hydrogen atoms present at the locations where the metal-carbon bonds are formed will be higher than with a benzene ring.
  • A311, A312, and A313 represent each independently C—R or a nitrogen atom. R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Substituents listed as the aforementioned Substituent Group A can be used as the substituent represented by R. If A311, A312, and A313 are C—R, the R [groups] are preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, a dialkylamino group, a diarylamino group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a cyano group, or a halogen atom, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, a dialkylamino group, a cyano group, or a fluorine atom, and even more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, or a fluorine atom. In addition, if possible, the substituents may be linked to each other to form a condensed ring structure.
  • It is preferable for at least one of A311, A312, and A313 to be a nitrogen atom, and it is especially preferable for A311 to be a nitrogen atom.
  • One of the more preferred modes of the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-3 is a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-3-1 below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00005
  • In the formula, X, Y, Z, and M represent each independently a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom. However, either Z or Y is a nitrogen atom. When Y is a nitrogen atom, X is a carbon atom. m, n, p, and q represent each independently an integer from 0 to 3. Ar represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group. R1 to R3 and R30 represent each independently an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a silyl group, or a heterocyclic group. If m, n, p, and q are 2 or greater, respectively adjacent ones of the plurality of R1, R2, R3, and R30 [groups] may be linked to each other to form a cyclic structure. Q is a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
  • General Formula C-3-1 will now be described.
  • X, Y, and Z represent a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom, either Z or Y is a nitrogen atom, and when Y is a nitrogen atom, X is a carbon atom. It is preferable for Z to be a carbon atom, for Y to be a nitrogen atom, and for X to be a carbon atom.
  • m, n, and p represent each independently an integer from 0 to 3. Of these, m is preferably from 0 to 2 and more preferably 0 or 1. n is preferably from 0 to 2 and more preferably 0 or 1. p is preferably from 0 to 2 and more preferably 0 or 1.
  • R1 to R3 represent each independently an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a silyl group, or a heterocyclic group.
  • The aforementioned alkyl group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C1 to C20 alkyl group and may have a linear, branched, or cyclic structure. The aforementioned alkyl group is preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, concrete examples of which include a methyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, an octyl group, a decyl group, and a dodecyl group.
  • The aforementioned aryl group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C6 to C10 aryl group and may be condensed into a ring, examples of which include a phenyl group, a toluyl group, and a naphthyl group.
  • The aforementioned alkoxy group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C1 to C20 alkoxy group and may have a linear, branched, or cyclic structure. The aforementioned alkoxy group is preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, concrete examples of which include a methoxy group, an octyloxy group, a decyloxy group, a dodecyloxy group, an s-octyloxy group, and a benzyloxy group.
  • The aforementioned aryloxy group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C6 to C10 aryloxy group and may be condensed into a ring, examples of which include a phenyloxy group, a toluyloxy group, and a naphthyloxy group.
  • The aforementioned silyl group represents a silyl group which has been substituted with a C3 to C24 hydrocarbon group and may be a trialkylsilyl group, an aryldialkylsilyl group, an alkyldiarylsilyl group, or a triarylsilyl group. The aforementioned silyl group is preferably with a carbon number of 3 to 18, concrete examples of which include a trimethylsilyl group, a t-butyldimethylsilyl group, a triphenylsilyl group, and a t-butyldiphenylsilyl group.
  • Examples of the aforementioned heterocyclic group include a pyridine ring, a pyrimidine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyridazine ring, a triazine ring, an imidazole ring, a pyrazole ring, an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a triazole ring, an oxadiazole ring, and a thiadiazole ring, a thiophen ring, and a furan ring.
  • Of these, from the standpoint of aspect ratio, a linear alkyl group or, in the case of a group other than an alkyl group, having an alkyl group as a substituent is preferable.
  • Furthermore, R1 and R2 are preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, a fluorine atom, a cyano group, or a silyl group, more preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group, and [even more] preferably a phenyl group.
  • R3 is preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group, more preferably a methyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, or a phenyl group, and even more preferably a methyl group or a trifluoromethyl group.
  • Examples of the aryl group represented by Ar include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group, with a phenyl group being preferable. The aryl group represented by Ar may further have a substituent, and examples of this substituent include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a cyano group, an amino group, a fluorine atom, and a fluoroalkyl group, with a C1 to C6 alkyl group, a cyano group, an amino group, a fluorine atom, or a fluoroalkyl group (preferably a trifluoromethyl group) being preferable, and a C1 to C6 alkyl group or a fluorine atom being more preferable. Ar is more preferably a phenyl group having a substituent, and this substituent is preferably a methyl group, a t-butyl group, a 4-pentyl-cyclohexyl group, a 4-pentyl-cyclohexylmethoxy group, or the like.
  • If m, n, and p are 2 or greater, respectively adjacent ones of the plurality of R1 to R3 [groups] may be linked to each other to form a cyclic structure.
  • M and Q are each independently a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom.
  • q represents an integer from 0 to 3 and is preferably an integer from 0 to 2.
  • R30 represents an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a silyl group, or a heterocyclic group.
  • The aforementioned alkyl group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C1 to C20 alkyl group and may have a linear, branched, or cyclic structure. The aforementioned alkyl group is preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, concrete examples of which include a methyl group, an octyl group, a decyl group, a dodecyl group, an n-butyl group, a t-butyl group, a t-amyl group, and an s-butyl group.
  • The aforementioned aryl group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C6 to C10 aryl group and may be condensed into a ring, examples of which include a phenyl group, a toluyl group, and a naphthyl group.
  • The aforementioned alkoxy group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C1 to C20 alkoxy group and may have a linear, branched, or cyclic structure. The aforementioned alkoxy group is preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, concrete examples of which include a methoxy group, an octyloxy group, a decyloxy group, a dodecyloxy group, an s-octyloxy group, and a benzyloxy group.
  • The aforementioned aryloxy group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C6 to C10 aryloxy group and may be condensed into a ring, concrete examples of which include a phenyloxy group, a toluyloxy group, and a naphthyloxy group.
  • The aforementioned silyl group represents a silyl group which has been substituted with a C3 to C24 carbon atom and may be a trialkylsilyl group, an aryldialkylsilyl group, an alkyldiarylsilyl group, or a triarylsilyl group. The aforementioned silyl group is preferably with a carbon number of 3 to 18, concrete examples of which include a trimethylsilyl group, a t-butyldimethylsilyl group, a triphenylsilyl group, and a t-butyldiphenylsilyl group.
  • Examples of the aforementioned heterocyclic group include a pyridine ring, a pyrimidine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyridazine ring, a triazine ring, an imidazole ring, a pyrazole ring, an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a triazole ring, an oxadiazole ring, a thiadiazole ring, a thiophen ring, and a furan ring.
  • R30 is preferably a fluorine atom.
  • From the standpoint of aspect ratio, R30 is preferably a chain-form alkyl group or, in the case of a group other than an alkyl group, having an alkyl group as a substituent is preferable.
  • One of the more preferred modes of the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-2 is a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-4 below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00006
  • In the formula, A401 to A414 represent each independently C—R or a nitrogen atom. R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. L41 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group.
  • General Formula C-4 will now be described.
  • A401 to A414 represent each independently C—R or a nitrogen atom. R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent.
  • Substituents listed as the aforementioned Substituent Group A can be used as the substituent expressed by R.
  • A401 to A406 are preferably C—R, and the R [groups] may be linked to each other to form a ring. If A401 to A406 are C—R, the R [groups] of A402 and A405 are preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an amino group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an amino group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a fluorine atom, and especially preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group. The R [groups] of A401, A403, A404, and A406 are preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, an amino group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an amino group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, or a fluorine atom, and especially preferably a hydrogen atom.
  • L41 is defined the same as L21 in General Formula C-2 above, and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • For A407 to A414, the number of nitrogen atoms in A407 to A410 and in A411 to A414 is each preferably 0 to 2 and more preferably 0 or 1.
  • If A407 to A414 represent C—R, the R [groups] of A401 and A412 are preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, an amino group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, a trifluoroalkyl group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group, and especially preferably a hydrogen atom, a phenyl group, a trifluoroalkyl group, or a cyano group. The R [groups] of A407, A409, A411, and A413 are preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, an amino group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group, more preferably a hydrogen atom, a trifluoroalkyl group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group, and especially preferably a hydrogen atom, a phenyl group, or a fluorine atom. The R [groups] of A410 and A414 are preferably a hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom and more preferably a hydrogen atom. If any of A407 to A409 and A411 to A413 represents C—R, the R [groups] may be linked to each other to form a ring, and examples of the ring thus formed include a benzene ring and a pyridine ring.
  • One of the more preferred modes of the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-2 is a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-5 below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00007
  • In the formula, A501 to A512 represent each independently C—R or a nitrogen atom. R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. L51 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Y and Z represent each independently a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom, and at least either one is a nitrogen atom.
  • General Formula C-5 will now be described. A501 to A506 and L51 are defined the same as A401 to A406 and L41 in General Formula C-4 above, and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • A507, A508, A509, A510, A511 and A512 represent each independently C—R or a nitrogen atom. R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. Substituents listed as the aforementioned Substituent Group A can be used as the substituent represented by R. If A507, A508, A509, A510, A511 and A512 are C—R, R is preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, an aromatic heterocyclic group, a dialkylamino group, a diarylamino group, an alkyloxy group, a cyano group, or a halogen atom, more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoroalkyl group, an aryl group, a dialkylamino group, a cyano group, or a fluorine atom, and even more preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, or a fluorine atom. Moreover, if possible, the substituents may be linked to each other to form a condensed ring structure.
  • A mode is also preferable in which at least one of A507, A508, and A509 and at least one of A510, A511, and A512 are nitrogen atoms, and in the case of this mode, it is preferable for A510 or A507 to be a nitrogen atom.
  • One of the more preferred modes of the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-5 is a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-5-1 below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00008
  • In the formula, X, Y, and Z represent each independently a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom. However, either Z or Y is a nitrogen atom. When Y is a nitrogen atom, X is a carbon atom. m, n, p, and q represent each independently an integer from 0 to 3. Ar represents a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group. R1 to R4 represent each independently an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a silyl group, or a heterocyclic group. If m, n, p, and q are 2 or greater, respectively adjacent ones of the plurality of R1 to R4 [groups] may be linked to each other to form a cyclic structure.
  • General Formula C-5-1 will now be described.
  • X, Y, and Z represent a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom, either Z or Y is a nitrogen atom, and when Y is a nitrogen atom, X is a carbon atom. It is preferable for Z to be a carbon atom, for Y to be a nitrogen atom, and for X to be a carbon atom.
  • m, n, p, and q represent each independently an integer from 0 to 3. Of these, m is preferably from 0 to 2 and more preferably 0 or 1. n is preferably from 0 to 2 and more preferably 0 or 1. p is preferably from 0 to 2 and more preferably 0 or 1. q is preferably from 0 to 2 and more preferably 0 or 1.
  • R1 to R4 represent each independently an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a silyl group, or a heterocyclic group.
  • The aforementioned alkyl group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C1 to C20 alkyl group and may have a linear, branched, or cyclic structure. The aforementioned alkyl group is preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, concrete examples of which include a methyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, an octyl group, a decyl group, and a dodecyl group.
  • The aforementioned aryl group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C6 to C10 aryl group and may be condensed into a ring, examples of which include a phenyl group, a toluyl group, and a naphthyl group.
  • The aforementioned alkoxy group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C1 to C20 alkoxy group and may have a linear, branched, or cyclic structure. The aforementioned alkoxy group is preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, concrete examples of which include a methoxy group, an octyloxy group, a decyloxy group, a dodecyloxy group, an s-octyloxy group, and a benzyloxy group.
  • The aforementioned aryloxy group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C6 to C10 aryloxy group and may be condensed into a ring, examples of which include a phenyloxy group, a toluyloxy group, and a naphthyloxy group.
  • The aforementioned silyl group represents a silyl group which has been substituted with a C3 to C24 hydrocarbon group and may be a trialkylsilyl group, an aryldialkylsilyl group, an alkyldiarylsilyl group, or a triarylsilyl group. The aforementioned silyl group is preferably with a carbon number of 3 to 18, concrete examples of which include a trimethylsilyl group, a t-butyldimethylsilyl group, a triphenylsilyl group, and a t-butyldiphenylsilyl group.
  • Examples of the aforementioned heterocyclic group include a pyridine ring, a pyrimidine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyridazine ring, a triazine ring, an imidazole ring, a pyrazole ring, an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a triazole ring, an oxadiazole ring, a thiadiazole ring, a thiophen ring, and a furan ring.
  • Of these, from the standpoint of aspect ratio, a linear alkyl group or, in the case of a group other than an alkyl group, having an alkyl group as a substituent is preferable.
  • In addition, R1 and R2 are [each] preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, a fluorine atom, a cyano group, or a silyl group, and more preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • Furthermore, R3 and R4 are [each] preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group, more preferably a methyl group, a trifluoromethyl group, or a phenyl group, and even more preferably a methyl group or a trifluoromethyl group.
  • Examples of the aryl group represented by Ar include a phenyl group and a naphthyl group, with a phenyl group being preferable. The aryl group represented by Ar may further have a substituent, and examples of this substituent include an alkyl group, an aryl group, a cyano group, an amino group, a fluorine atom, and a fluoroalkyl group, with a C1 to C6 alkyl group, a cyano group, an amino group, a fluorine atom, or a fluoroalkyl group (preferably a trifluoromethyl group) being preferable, and a C1 to C6 alkyl group or a fluorine atom being more preferable. Ar is preferably a phenyl group having a substituent, and this substituent is preferably a methyl group, a t-butyl group, or a 4-methyl-cyclohexyl group.
  • If m, n, p, and q are 2 or greater, respectively adjacent ones of the plurality of R1 to R4 [groups] may be linked to each other to form a cyclic structure.
  • One of the more preferred modes of the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-2 is a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-6 below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00009
  • In the formula, X, Y, and Z represent each independently a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom. However, either Z or Y is a nitrogen atom. When Y is a nitrogen atom, X is a carbon atom. r, s, t, and u represent each independently an integer from 0 to 3. R5 to R8 represent each independently an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a silyl group, or a heterocyclic group. If r, s, t, and u are 2 or greater, respectively adjacent ones of the plurality of R5 to Rg [groups] may be linked to each other to form a cyclic structure. W1 and W2 represent each independently an alkyl group and may bond to each other to form a cyclic structure.
  • General Formula C-6 will now be described.
  • X, Y, and Z are defined the same as X, Y, and Z in General Formula C-5-1, and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • R5 to R8 are defined the same as R1 to R4 in General Formula C-5-1.
  • R5 and R6 are preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, a fluorine atom, or a cyano group.
  • The alkyl group represented by R5 and R6 may have a substituent and is preferably a methyl group, a butyl group, an octyl group, a decyl group, a dodecyl group, or the like.
  • The alkoxy group represented by R5 and R6 is preferably a decyloxy group.
  • The aryl group represented by R5 and R6 is preferably a phenyl group that may have a substituent, and this substituent is preferably an alkyl group and more preferably a propyl group or a butyl group.
  • R7 and R8 are preferably an alkyl group or an aryl group.
  • r, s, t, and u represent each independently an integer from 0 to 3. Of these, r is preferably from 0 to 2 and more preferably 0 or 1. s is preferably from 0 to 2 and more preferably 0 or 1. t is preferably 0 or 1, and u is preferably 0 or 1.
  • If r, s, t, and u are 2 or greater, respectively adjacent ones of the plurality of R5 to R8 [groups] may be linked to each other to form a cyclic structure. Examples of this cyclic structure include structures in which a benzene ring, a benzofuran ring, a six-membered ring having Z, a fluorene ring, or the like is formed.
  • W1 and W2 represent a C1 to C10 alkyl group and may bond to each other to form a cyclic structure.
  • Examples of the alkyl group represented by W1 and W2 include a methyl group, an ethyl group, an n-propyl group, an n-butyl group, and a pentyl group, with a methyl group being preferable.
  • Moreover, an example of the cyclic structure formed by the bonding of W1 and W2 is a cyclohexyl ring structure.
  • From the standpoint of high aspect ratio, it is preferable if W1 and W2 are a methyl group or bond to each other to form a cyclohexyl ring structure.
  • Another one of the more preferred modes of the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-1 is a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-7 below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00010
  • In the formula, L61 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. A61 represents a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom. Z61 and Z62 represent each independently a nitrogen-containing aromatic heterocycle. Z63 represents a benzene ring or an aromatic heterocycle. Q is an anionic acyclic ligand bound to platinum.
  • General Formula C-7 will now be described.
  • L61 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group, and the preferred ranges are the same as those of L1 in General Formula C-1 above.
  • A61 represents a carbon atom or a nitrogen atom. From the standpoint of the stability of the complex and the standpoint of luminescent quantum yield of the complex, A61 is preferably a carbon atom.
  • Z61 and Z62 are respectively defined the same as Z21 and Z22 in General Formula C-2 above, and the preferred ranges are also the same. Z63 is defined the same as Z23 in General Formula C-2 above, and the preferred ranges are also the same.
  • Q is an anionic acyclic ligand bound to platinum. An acyclic ligand is one in which the atom bound to platinum does not form a ring in a ligand state. The atom in Q that is bound to platinum is preferably a carbon atom, a nitrogen atom, an oxygen atom, or a sulfur atom, more preferably a nitrogen atom or an oxygen atom, and most preferably an oxygen atom.
  • A vinyl ligand is an example of Q that is bound to platinum by a carbon atom. Examples of Q bound to platinum by a nitrogen atom include an amino ligand and an imino ligand. Examples of Q bound to platinum by an oxygen atom include an alkoxy ligand, an aryloxy ligand, a heteroaryloxy ligand, an acyloxy ligand, a silyloxy ligand, a carboxyl ligand, a phosphate ligand, and a sulfonate ligand. Examples of Q bound to platinum by a sulfur atom include an alkylmercapto ligand, an arylmercapto ligand, a heteroarylmercapto ligand, and a thiocarboxylate ligand.
  • The ligand represented by Q may have a substituent. Those listed as the aforementioned Substituent Group A can be used as the substituent as needed. In addition, the substituents may also be linked to each other.
  • The ligand represented by Q is preferably a ligand bound to platinum by an oxygen atom, more preferably an acyloxy ligand, an alkoxy ligand, an aryloxy ligand, a heteroaryloxy ligand, or a silyloxy ligand, and even more preferably an acyloxy ligand.
  • One of the more preferred modes of the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-7 is a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-8 below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00011
  • In the formula, A701 to A710 represent each independently C—R or a nitrogen atom. R represents a hydrogen atom or a substituent. L71 represents a single bond or a divalent linking group. Q is an anionic acyclic ligand bound to platinum.
  • General Formula C-8 will now be described.
  • L71 is defined the same as L61 in General Formula C-6 [sic]7 above, and the preferred ranges are also the same. A701 to A710 are defined the same as A401 to A410 in General Formula C-4, and the preferred ranges are also the same. Y [sic]8 is defined the same as that in General Formula C-6, and the preferred ranges are also the same. 7 Translator's note: apparent error in the original; “General Formula C-6” should be “General Formula C-7.”8 Translator's note: there is no “Y” in this chemical formula.
  • Another preferred mode of the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-1 is a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-9 below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00012
  • In the formula, A and B represent a cyclic structure; A represents an aromatic ring, while B represents an aromatic heterocycle. When either A or B forms a ring, the other may not form a ring. R13 to R16 represent each independently a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a silyl group, or a heterocyclic group, and [each pair of] R14 and R15, and R13 and R16 may bond to each other to form a cyclic structure.
  • General Formula C-9 will now be described.
  • A represents an aromatic ring. Examples of the aromatic ring include an aromatic hydrocarbon ring and an aromatic heterocycle, with an aromatic hydrocarbon ring being preferable. The aromatic hydrocarbon ring represented by A is preferably a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring. The aromatic heterocycle represented by A is preferably a pyridine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyrimidine ring, or a quinoline ring.
  • B represents an aromatic heterocycle. The aromatic heterocycle represented by B is preferably a pyridine ring or a pyrimidine ring.
  • The combination of A and B is preferably A being a benzene ring and B being acyclic (not forming a ring), or A being a naphthalene ring and B being acyclic, and more preferably A being a benzene ring and B being a pyridine ring, or A being acyclic and B being a pyridine ring.
  • R13 to R16 represent [each independently] a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a silyl group, or a heterocyclic group, and [each pair of] R14 and R15, and R13 and R16 may bond to each other to form a cyclic structure.
  • The aforementioned alkyl group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C1 to C20 alkyl group and may have a linear, branched, or cyclic structure. The aforementioned alkyl group is preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 12, and examples include a methyl group, a butyl group, a pentyl group, a hexyl group, an octyl group, a decyl group, and a dodecyl group.
  • The aforementioned aryl group represents a substituted or unsubstituted C6 to C10 aryl group and may be condensed into a ring, examples of which include a phenyl group, a tolyl group, and a naphthyl group.
  • The aforementioned silyl group represents a silyl group which has been substituted with a C3 to C24 carbon atom and may be a trialkylsilyl group, an aryldialkylsilyl group, an alkyldiarylsilyl group, or a triarylsilyl group. The aforementioned silyl group is preferably with a carbon number of 3 to 18, with examples including a trimethylsilyl group, a t-butyldimethylsilyl group, a triphenylsilyl group, and a t-butyldiphenylsilyl group.
  • Examples of the aforementioned heterocyclic group include a pyridine ring, a pyrimidine ring, a pyrazine ring, a pyridazine ring, a triazine ring, an imidazole ring, a pyrazole ring, an oxazole ring, a thiazole ring, a triazole ring, an oxadiazole ring, a thiadiazole ring, a thiophene ring, and a furan ring.
  • With regard to R13, R14, R15, and R16, it is preferable for [each of these] to be a substituted or unsubstituted aryl group or for each [pair of] R13 and R16, and R14 and R15 to be bonded to form an aromatic ring. An example of this aromatic ring is a benzene ring. This aromatic ring may further have a substituent, examples of which include an alkyl group (methyl group, butyl group, pentyl group, hexyl group, octyl group, and decyl group) and an alkoxy group (methoxy group, ethoxy group, butoxy group, etc.).
  • Of these, from the standpoints of molecular size and aspect ratio, an aromatic ring in which R13 and R16, and R14 and R15 are respectively bonded is preferable.
  • An example of a more preferred mode of the compound expressed by General Formula C-9 is a compound of General Formula C-9-1 below.
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00013
  • In the formula, B may form an aromatic 6-membered heterocycle.
  • R17 to R26 represent each independently an alkyl group, an aryl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, a cyano group, a silyl group, or a heterocyclic group, and [each pair of] R17 and R18, R18 and R19, R19 and R20, R21 and R22, R22 and R23, R23 and R24, and R23 and R26 may bond to each other to form a cyclic structure. Preferred examples of the alkyl groups, aryl groups, alkoxy groups, aryloxy groups, cyano groups, silyl groups, or heterocyclic groups represented by R17 to R26 are the same as the examples of the respective groups expressed by R13 to R26.
  • R17, R20, R21, and R24 are preferably a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group.
  • R18, R19, R22, and R23 are [each] preferably an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryl group, an aryloxy group, a fluorine atom, a cyano group, or a silyl group, more preferably an alkyl group or an alkoxy group, and even more preferably a decyloxy group or a dodecyloxy group.
  • R25 and R26 are preferably a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, a fluorine atom, or an aromatic ring in which R25 and R26 are bonded.
  • The aromatic six-membered heterocycle represented by B is preferably a pyridine ring or a pyrimidine ring, with a pyridine ring being more preferable. This ring may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include an alkyl group (methyl group or butyl group) and an aryl group (phenyl group).
  • If R17 to R26 are chain-form alkyl groups or groups other than an alkyl group, they preferably have an alkyl group as a substituent from the standpoint of aspect ratio.
  • The platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-1 is preferably a platinum complex expressed by any of General Formula C-2, C-7, or C-9 and more preferably a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-2 or C-9. The platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-2 is preferably a platinum complex expressed by any of General Formula C-3, C-4, C-5, or C-6, more preferably a platinum complex expressed by any of General Formula C-3-1, C-5-1, or C-6, and especially preferably a platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-5-1 or C-6.
  • Concrete examples of the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-1 include the compounds described in [0143] to [0152], [0157], [0158], and [0162] to [0168] in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2005-310733, the compounds described in [0065] to [0083] in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2006-256999, the compounds described in [0065] to [0090] in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2006-93542, the compounds described in [0063] to [0071] in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2007-73891, the compounds described in [0079] to [0083] in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2007-324309, the compounds described in [0065] to [0090] in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2006-93542, the compounds described in [0055] to [0071] in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2007-96255, and the compounds described in [0043] to [0046] in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2006-313796.
  • Examples of the platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-1 and other platinum complexes having an aspect ratio that is greater than 3 will be shown below. Note that the alkyl group and the alkyl group [sic] in the compounds shown as examples include linear alkyl groups, branched alkyl groups, and cycloalkyl groups, with a linear alkyl group being preferable.
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00014
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00015
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00016
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00017
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00018
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00019
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00020
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00021
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00022
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00023
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00024
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00025
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00026
  • The platinum complex expressed by General Formula C-1 can be synthesized by various methods such as the method described in line 53 of the left-hand column to line 7 of the right-hand column on page 789, the method described in lines 18 to 38 of the left-hand column on page 790, or the method described in lines 19 to 30 of the right-hand column on page 790 in Journal of Organic Chemistry 53, 786, (1988), G. R. Newkome et al., or by a combination of these [methods], as well as by the method described in lines 26 to 35 of page 2752 in Chemische Berichte [Chemical Reports] 113, 2749 (1980), H. Lexy et al.
  • For example, [the platinum complex] can be obtained by treating a ligand or a dissociate thereof and a metal compound in the presence or absence of a solvent (such as a halogen-based solvent, an alcohol-based solvent, an ether-based solvent, an ester-based solvent, a ketone-based solvent, a nitrile-based solvent, an amide-based solvent, a sulfone-based solvent, a sulfoxide-based solvent, or water) and in the presence or absence of a base (various inorganic or organic bases such as sodium methoxide, t-butoxy potassium, triethylamine, and potassium carbonate) at room temperature or below or under heating (in addition to normal heating, a method involving heating by microwaves is also effective).
  • Pyrene Derivatives
  • Any conventionally known pyrene derivative can be used as the pyrene derivative, but it is preferable to use a compound expressed by General Formula P-1 (hereinafter also referred to as “compound P-1”) below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00027
  • In the formula, RP 1 to RP 10 represent each independently a hydrogen atom, an aromatic hydrocarbon group that may have a substituent, an alkyl group that may have a substituent, a silyl group that may have a substituent, a heterocyclic group that may have a substituent, an alkylamino group that may have a substituent, or an arylamino group that may have a substituent, and at least one of RP 1 to RP 10 is a group other than a hydrogen atom.
  • <RP 1 to RP 10>
  • (Type of Substituents RP 1 to RP 10)
  • RP 1 to RP 10 represent each independently a hydrogen atom, an aromatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent, an alkyl group which may have a substituent, a silyl group which may have a substituent, a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, an alkylamino group which may have a substituent, or an arylamino group which may have a substituent. These may be bonded to each other and condensed into a ring. At least one of RP 1 to RP 10 is a group other than a hydrogen atom.
  • If two or more of RP 1 to RP 10 are a group other than a hydrogen atom, such a plurality of groups other than a hydrogen atom may be the same or different. It is preferable for these to be the same in terms of ease of synthesis, but it is preferable for these to be different in terms of allowing tuning of the emission wavelength.
  • Furthermore, in terms of obtaining a high luminous efficiency, the groups other than a hydrogen atom in RP 1 to RP 10 are preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent or a silyl group which may have a substituent, with an aromatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent being especially preferable. Moreover, in terms of obtaining emission with a narrow half-value width, the groups other than a hydrogen atom in RP 1 to RP 10 are preferably an alkyl group which may have a substituent, an arylamino group which may have substituent, or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent, and in terms of obtaining a longer emission wavelength, the groups other than a hydrogen atom in RP 1, RP 3 to RP 6, and RP 8 to RP 10 are preferably an aromatic hydrocarbon group which may have a substituent or a heterocyclic group which may have a substituent.
  • The aromatic hydrocarbon groups represented by RP 1 to RP 10 are preferably with a carbon number of 6 to 16, and these are not limited at all to being monocyclic groups and may instead be condensed polycyclic hydrocarbon groups. Concrete examples of aromatic hydrocarbon groups include a phenyl group, a biphenyl group, a phenanthryl group, a naphthyl group, an anthryl group, and a fluorenyl group.
  • The alkyl groups represented by RP 1 to RP 10 are preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 10, and concrete examples include an i-propyl group, a t-butyl group, and a cyclohexyl group.
  • The silyl groups are preferably with a carbon number of 3 to 20, and concrete examples include a trimethylsilyl group, a dimethylphenylsilyl group, a dimethylbutylsilyl group, a triisopropylsilyl group, and a methyldibutylsilyl group.
  • The heterocyclic groups represented by RP 1 to RP 10 are preferably with a carbon number of 3 to 10, and concrete examples include a pyridyl group, a thienyl group, an oxazole group, an oxadiazole group, a benzothienyl group, a dibenzofuryl group, a dibenzothienyl group, a pyrazyl group, a pyrimidyl group, a pyrazoyl group, an imidazoyl group, and a phenylcarbazoyl group.
  • The alkylamino groups represented by RP 1 to RP 10 are preferably with a carbon number of 1 to 10, and concrete examples include a dimethylamino group, a diethylamino group, a dipropylamino group, and a dibutylamino group.
  • The arylamino groups represented by RP 1 to RP 10 are preferably with a carbon number of 6 to 30, and concrete examples include a diphenylamino group, a carbazoyl group, and a phenylnaphthylamino group.
  • Examples of the substituent that these groups may have include an aryl group, an arylamino group, an alkyl group, a perfluoroalkyl group, a halide group, a carboxyl group, a cyano group, an alkoxyl group, an aryloxy group, a carbonyl group, an oxycarbonyl group, a carboxylic acid group, and a heterocyclic group. Preferable examples include a C6 to C16 aryl group, a C12 to C30 arylamino group, a C1 to C12 alkyl group, a C1 to C12 perfluoroalkyl group, a fluoride group, a C1 to C10 oxycarbonyl group, a cyano group, a C1 to C10 alkoxy group, a C6 to C16 aryloxy group, a C2 to C16 carbonyl group, and a C5 to C20 heterocyclic group.
  • Of these substituents, examples of C6 to C16 aryl groups include a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and a phenanthryl group.
  • Examples of C12 to C30 arylamino groups include a diphenylamino group, a carbazoyl group, and a phenylcarbazoyl group.
  • Examples of C1 to C12 alkyl groups include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a butyl group, an i-propyl group, a neopentyl group, and a t-butyl group.
  • An example of a C1 to C12 perfluoroalkyl group is a trifluoromethyl group.
  • Examples of a C1 to C10 oxycarbonyl group include a methoxycarbonyl group and an ethoxycarbonyl group.
  • Examples of a C1 to C10 alkoxy group include a methoxy group and an ethoxy group.
  • An example of a C6 to C16 aryloxy group is a phenyloxy group.
  • Examples of a C2 to C16 carbonyl group include an acetyl group and a phenylcarbonyl group.
  • Examples of a C3 to C20 heterocyclic group include a pyridyl group, a thienyl group, an oxazole group, an oxadiazole group, a benzothienyl group, a dibenzofuryl group, a dibenzothienyl group, a pyrazyl group, a pyrimidyl group, a pyrazoyl group, and an imidazoyl group.
  • Of the aforementioned RP 1 to RP 10 [groups] and the substituents which RP 1 to RP 10 may have, electron-donating groups such as an arylamino group or an alkoxy group and heterocyclic groups such as a thienyl group or a benzothienyl group contribute to increasing the emission wavelength of the compound P-1. Therefore, by selecting [one of] these substituents as RP 1 to RP 10 or the substituents which RP 1 to RP 10 may have, it is also possible to obtain a product that will emit green light.
  • Note that, of the compounds P-1, compounds expressed by General Formulas P-1a, P-1b, P-1c, P-1d, and P-1e below are especially preferable. In General Formulas P-1a, P-1b, P-1c, P-1d, and P-1e, RP 1 to RP 10 are defined the same as the RP 1 to RP 10 in General Formula P-1. In addition, RP 1 and RP 2, and RP 6 and RP 7 in General Formula P-1c, RP 1 and RP 10, and RP 5 and RP 6 in General Formula P-1d, and RP 9 and RP 10, and RP 4 and RP 5 in General Formula P-1e bond to each other to form a ring. The rings formed here are preferably five- or six-membered rings.
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00028
  • Concrete examples of pyrene derivatives that can be used in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited to or by these:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00029
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00030
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00031
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00032
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00033
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00034
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00035
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00036
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00037
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00038
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00039
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00040
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00041
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00042
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00043
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00044
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00045
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00046
  • The pyrene derivatives expressed by General Formulas P-1a to P-1e can be synthesized by the following scheme:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00047
  • [Key or the Text in the Chemical Formula (from Top to Bottom and from Left to Right):
  • halogenation coupling reaction using Pd catalyst
    halogenation 1) coupling reaction using Pd catalyst
    2) cyclization reaction
    Halogenation
  • 1) coupling reaction using Pd catalyst
  • 2) cyclization reaction]
  • In the scheme described above, RP 1 to RP 10 are defined the same as the RP 1 to RP 10 in General Formula P-1. X represents a halogen atom.
  • Perylene Derivatives
  • Any conventionally known perylene derivative can be used as the perylene derivative, but it is preferable to use a compound expressed by General Formula PE-1 below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00048
  • In the formula, RPE 1 to RPE 4 represent each independently an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an amino group, a silyl group, an ester group, an amido group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group, and these may further have a substituent. Moreover, these may bond to each other to form a ring.
  • nPE 1 to nPE 4 represent each independently an integer from 0 to 3. When nPE 1 to nPE 4 are 2 or greater, the plurality of RPE 1 to RPE 4 [groups] may bond to each other to form a ring. Furthermore, hydrogen atoms in the formula may be deuterium atoms.
  • RPE 1 to RPE 4 are preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an amino group, a silyl group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group and more preferably an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an amino group, or a silyl group. These groups may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent include the groups listed as the aforementioned Substituent Group A. If there are a plurality of substituents, these substituents may be linked to each other to form a ring.
  • nPE 1 to nPE 4 are preferably from 0 to 2, and 0 or 1 is more preferable.
  • The compound expressed by General Formula PE-1 is preferably a compound expressed by any of General Formulas PE-1a to PE-1f below.
  • In General Formulas PE-1a to PE-lf, the RN [groups] represent each independently an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, an amino group, a silyl group, an ester group, an amido group, an alkoxy group, an aryloxy group, a heteroaryloxy group, an alkylthio group, or an arylthio group. These may further have a substituent. In addition, the Rpe [groups] in General Formulas PE-1d to PE-1f may form each independently a five- or six-membered ring, and this ring may further have a substituent.
  • Moreover, hydrogen atoms in General Formulas PE-1a to PE-1f may be deuterium atoms.
  • Rpe is preferably an alkyl group (methyl group, propyl group, butyl group, etc.), an aryl group (phenyl group, naphthyl group, etc.), a heterocyclic group (pyridyl group, etc.), an amino group, a silyl group, or an amide group.
  • Examples of the substituent which Rpe and the ring formed by Rpe may have include an alkyl group (methyl group, butyl group, etc.) and an aryl group (phenyl group, etc.).
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00049
  • Concrete examples of the perylene derivatives that can be used in the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited to or by these:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00050
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00051
  • [Key for the Text in the Chemical Formula (from Top to Bottom and from Left to Right):
  • perylene 1 perylene 2 perylene 3
    perylene 4 perylene 5 perylene 6
    perylene 7 perylene 8 perylene 9]
  • The perylene derivatives expressed by General Formula PE-1 can be synthesized by the following scheme:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00052
  • [Key for the text in the chemical formula (from top to bottom and from left to right):
      • halogenation
      • coupling reaction using Pd catalyst
      • cyclization reaction]
  • In the scheme described above, the Rpe [groups] are defined the same as the RPE 1 to RPE 4 [groups] in General Formula PE-1. X represents a halogen atom.
  • π-Conjugated Compounds Expressed by General Formula R-1
  • The π-conjugated compounds expressed by General Formula R-1 will now be described. These compounds are charge transporting amine-based π-conjugated compounds that do not exhibit a distinct melting point, have a glass transition point of 60° C. or higher, and have a molecular weight in the range of 400 to 2500, and the ratio (L/D) of the length (L) and diameter (D) of the smallest diameter cylinder inscribed by the π-conjugated compound is 2.5 or more.
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00053
  • (Here, Ar1 to Ar3 represent each independently a divalent C6 to C30 aromatic hydrocarbon group, Ar4 to Ar7 represent each independently a C6 to C30 aromatic hydrocarbon group, the two aromatic hydrocarbon groups that make up Ar4 and Ar5 may bond via a direct bond or via a substituent to form a condensed heterocycle with the nitrogen atoms which Ar4 and Ar5 replace, and the two aromatic hydrocarbon groups that make up Ar6 and Ar7 may bond via a direct bond or via a substituent to form a condensed heterocycle with the nitrogen atoms which Ar6 and Ar7 replace. L1 and L2 represent each independently a vinylene group or an acetylene group. l, m, n, o, and p represent each independently an integer from 0 to 6, but one of l, n, and p is not 0.)
  • Preferable examples of the π-conjugated compounds expressed by General Formula R-1 are the π-conjugated compounds expressed by General Formula R-2 or R-3 below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00054
  • (Here, Ar1 to Ar3, L1, L2, and l to p mean the same as in General Formula R-1. The R5 [groups] represent each independently a substituent. The q [groups] represent each independently an integer from 0 to 5.)
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00055
  • (Here, Ar2 means the same as in General Formula R-1. The R5 [groups] represent each independently a substituent. The q [groups] represent each independently an integer from 0 to 5.)
  • The π-conjugated compounds expressed by General Formula R-1 above are charge transporting amine-based π-conjugated compounds that do not exhibit a distinct melting point, have a glass transition point of 60° C. or higher, and have a molecular weight in the range of 400 to 2500. Furthermore, the ratio (L/D) of the length (L) and diameter (D) of the smallest diameter cylinder inscribed by this π-conjugated compound is 2.5 or more. Here, L/D is a numerical value that defines the length of the molecule of the π-conjugated compound; the larger the value, the longer [the molecule]. The orientation control has a greater effect with a slender molecule. Therefore, L/D is preferably within a range of 3 to 10. Moreover, the amine-based π-conjugated compound is preferably a compound having an amino group or an N-heterocyclic group at the end of the compound skeleton (the aromatic ring-containing skeleton). The compounds expressed by General Formula R-1 include compounds expressed by General Formula R-2 and General Formula R-3.
  • The aforementioned amino group is preferably an aromatic amino group represented by —N(Ar)2 (where Ar is an aromatic group). In addition, the N-heterocyclic group is a cyclic amino group and is preferably an N-heterocyclic group such as an N-carbazolyl group, an N-phenoxazinyl group, or an N-phenothiazinyl group bonded at a nitrogen atom at the end of the compound skeleton.
  • In General Formula R-1, Ar1 to Ar3 represent each independently a divalent C6 to C30 aromatic hydrocarbon group, Ar4 to Ar7 represent each independently a C6 to C30 aromatic hydrocarbon group, and Ar4 and Ar5, and Ar6 and Ar7 are such that the two aromatic hydrocarbon groups constituting Ar4 and Ar5, and Ar6 and Ar7 may bond via a direct bond or via a substituent to form a condensed heterocycle with the N replaced by Ar4 and Ar5, and Ar6 and Ar7. Furthermore, —NAr6Ar7 or —NAr6 and Ar7 may form a cyclic amino group. The condensed heterocycle here shall be understood to be a structure in which there is a heterocycle including an N in the center, and there is an aromatic hydrocarbon group condensed on both sides of this. In concrete terms, an N-carbazolyl group is an example, but a tricyclic compound is not the only option, and it may be tetracyclic or higher and may have a substituent.
  • L1 and L2 represent each independently a vinylene group or an acetylene group.
  • l, m, n, o, and p represent each independently an integer from 0 to 6, but one of l, n, and p is not 0. The total of l, m, n, o, and p is preferably within a range of 2 to 10, and this is related to the aforementioned L/D [ratio]. Moreover, if l, m, n, o, or p is an integer greater than 6, the molecular weight of the π-conjugated compound will be [too] high, and this will make it more difficult to form a film by vapor deposition. Therefore, it is preferable for l, m, n, o, and p to be integers from 0 to 3 and for one of l, n, and p to be an integer that is not 0.
  • The aforementioned π-conjugated compound is preferably such that the ratio (L/D) of the diameter (D) and length (L) of the smallest diameter cylinder inscribed by the molecule of the π-conjugated compound is 2.5 or more. When L/D increases, the molecular weight of the π-conjugated compound is larger, which is undesirable because it is more difficult to form a film by vapor deposition. [This ratio is] preferably at least 2.5 and no more than 10.0 and especially preferably at least 2.5 and no more than 5.0.
  • Of the compounds expressed by General Formula R-1, preferable compounds are compounds expressed by General Formula R-2 and General Formula R-3.
  • In General Formula R-2, Ar1 to Ar3, L1, L2, and l to p have the same meanings as Ar1 to Ar3, L1, L2, and l to p in General Formula R-1. In addition, Ar2 in General Formula R-3 means the same as Ar2 in General Formula R-1.
  • In General Formulas R-2 and R-3, the Rs [groups] represent each independently a substituent, and the groups listed as the aforementioned Substituent Group A can be used as needed as this substituent. The substituent represented by Rs is preferably an alkyl group.
  • The q [groups] represent each independently an integer from 0 to 5, preferably an integer from 0 to 3, and more preferably 0 or 1.
  • In General Formula R-1, Ar1 to Ar3 are [each] a divalent hydrocarbon-based aromatic group produced by taking two hydrogens from a C6 to C30 hydrocarbon-based aromatic compound, and Ar4 to Ar7 are [each] a monovalent hydrocarbon-based aromatic group produced by taking one hydrogen from a C6 to C30 hydrocarbon-based aromatic compound. Examples of such hydrocarbon-based aromatic compounds include benzene, biphenyl, and terphenyl, as well as naphthalene, anthracene, tetracene, phenanthrene, chrysene, coronene, fluorene, and other such condensed ring structures. Examples of aromatic hydrocarbon compounds that give the aforementioned hydrocarbon-based aromatic group are shown below, but this list is not intended to be exhaustive. The following examples are examples in which there is no substituent, but as long as the carbon number is within the range given above, there may be a substituent such as an alkyl group:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00056
  • The aforementioned π-conjugated compound does not exhibit a distinct melting point and has a glass transition point of 60° C. or higher. The Tg is preferably 60 to 300° C. It is undesirable for the Tg to exceed this temperature because this will entail a considerable burden on the equipment in order to control the substrate temperature during vapor deposition film formation, or sublimation of the π-conjugated compound formed on the substrate will occur. Furthermore, the molecular weight of this π-conjugated compound is within the range of 400 to 2500 and preferably within the range of 400 to 1000. Forming a film by vapor deposition will be difficult if this molecular weight is exceeded.
  • Concrete examples of the π-conjugated compound expressed by General Formula R-1 are given below, but these are not limiting in nature.
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00057
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00058
  • The pyrene derivatives expressed by General Formulas P-1a to P-1d above and the π-conjugated compounds expressed by General Formula R-1 above are preferable as the fluorescent material in the present invention, the π-conjugated compounds expressed by General Formula R-1 above and pyrene derivatives with high symmetry, such as compounds 128, 129, and 133 to 179 given above, are more preferable, and the π-conjugated compounds listed in the concrete examples given above are especially preferable. The aforementioned π-conjugated compounds and the aforementioned pyrene derivatives can realize a high degree of orientation (S).
  • There are no particular restrictions on the thickness of the light-emitting layer, but in general, it is preferably from 2 to 500 nm, and from the standpoint of external quantum efficiency, it is more preferably from 3 to 200 nm and even more preferably from 5 to 100 nm.
  • The light-emitting layer in the element of the present invention may be constituted solely from a light-emitting material or may also be made up of a mixed layer of a host material and a light-emitting material. There may be just one type of light-emitting material, or two or more types may be used. The host material is preferably a charge transport material. There may be just one type of host material, or two or more types may be used, examples of which include a mixed configuration of an electron transporting host material and a hole transporting host material.
  • Furthermore, a material which does not have a charge transporting property and does not emit light may also be included in the light-emitting layer.
  • Moreover, the light-emitting layer may be a single layer or a multilayer of two or more layers, and each of the light-emitting layers may also emit light of a different color.
  • In addition, in the light-emitting layer, it is also preferable for a host material or the like other than the light-emitting material to be a planar material.
  • The amount of the light-emitting material contained in the light-emitting layer of the present invention is preferably 0.1 to 30 wt %, more preferably 1 to 25 wt %, and especially preferably 5 to 20 wt %.
  • <Host Material>
  • The aforementioned light-emitting layer preferably further contains a host material. The host material may be a hole transporting host material or an electron transporting host material, but a hole transporting host material can be used [sic].
  • The following compounds may be contained as the host material to be used in the present invention. Examples include pyrrole, indole, carbazole (such as CBP(4,4′-di(9-carbazoyl)biphenyl)), azaindole, azacarbazole, triazole, oxazole, oxadiazole, pyrazole, imidazole, thiophene, polyarylalkane, pyrazoline, pyrazolone, phenylenediamine, arylamine, amino-substituted chalcone, styrylanthracene, fluorenone, hydrazone, stilbene, silazane, aromatic tertiary amine compounds, styrylamine compounds, porphyrin-based compounds, polysilane-based compounds, poly(N-vinylcarbazole), aniline-based copolymers, conductive macromolecular oligomers such as thiophene oligomers and polythiophene, organosilanes, carbon films, pyridine, pyrimidine, triazine, imidazole, pyrazole, triazole, oxazole, oxadiazole [sic]9, fluorenone, anthraquinodimethane, anthrone, diphenylquinone, thiopyran dioxide, carbodiimide, fluorenylidenemethane, distyrylpyrazine, fluorine-substituted aromatic compounds, heterocyclic tetracarboxylic acid anhydrides such as naphthalene and perylene, phthalocyanine, and a variety of metal complexes typified by metal complexes of an 8-quinolinol derivative, metal phthalocyanine, and metal complexes having benzoxazole or benzothiazole as a ligand, and derivatives of these (which may have a substituent or a condensed ring), as well as aromatic hydrocarbon compounds such as triphenylene derivatives. 9 Translator's note: “imidazole,” “pyrazole,” “triazole,” “oxazole,” and “oxadiazole” are repeated in this list in the original.
  • The host material in the present invention is preferably a planar host material from the standpoint of the orientation of the light-emitting material, more preferably a triphenylene derivative or a carbazole compound such as those described later, and even more preferably a triphenylene derivative.
  • In the light-emitting layer of the present invention, from the standpoints of color purity, luminous efficiency, and drive durability, it is preferable for the lowest excited triplet energy (T1 energy) of the aforementioned host material to be higher than the T1 energy of the aforementioned light-emitting material.
  • Furthermore, there are no particular restrictions on the amount of the host material contained in the light-emitting layer of the present invention, but from the standpoints of luminous efficiency and drive voltage, it is preferably at least 15 wt % and no more than 95 wt % with respect to the total weight of the compounds which form the light-emitting layer.
  • In the present invention, it is preferable to include at least one compound expressed by General Formula 4-1 or 4-2, which are carbazole compounds, as a host material.
  • The compound expressed by General Formula 4-1 or 4-2 is preferably contained in the light-emitting layer in an amount of 30 to 99 wt %, more preferably 40 to 97 wt %, and especially preferably 50 to 95 wt %. Moreover, if a compound expressed by General Formula 4-1 or 4-2 is used in a plurality of organic layers, then it is preferably contained within the aforementioned range in each of those layers.
  • A compound expressed by General Formula 4-1 or 4-2 may be contained as a single type in any of the organic layers, or a combination of a plurality of compounds expressed by General Formula 4-1 or 4-2 may be contained in the desired ratio.
  • The aforementioned host material is preferably a compound expressed by General Formula 4-1 or 4-2 below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00059
  • (In General Formulas 4-1 and 4-2, d and e represent integers from 0 to 3, and at least one of these is 1 or greater. f represents an integer from 1 to 4. R8 represents a substituent, and if there are a plurality of R8 [groups], the R8 [groups] may be the same as or different from each other. In addition, at least one of the R8 [groups] represents a carbazole group expressed by General Formula 5 below:)
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00060
  • (in General Formula 5, R9 [groups] represent each independently a substituent. g represents an integer from 0 to 8.)
  • The R8 [groups] represent each independently a substituent, and in concrete terms, they are a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, a heterocyclic group, or a substituent expressed by General Formula 5. If R8 does not represent [a carbazole group expressed by] General Formula 5, it is preferably a C10 or lower alkyl group or a substituted or unsubstituted C10 or lower aryl group, with a C6 or lower alkyl group being more preferable.
  • The R9 [groups] represent each independently a substituent, and in concrete terms, they are a halogen atom, an alkoxy group, a cyano group, a nitro group, an alkyl group, an aryl group, or a heterocyclic group, preferably a C10 or lower alkyl group or a C10 or lower substituted or unsubstituted aryl group, and more preferably a C6 or lower alkyl group.
  • g is an integer from 0 to 8, and from a standpoint of not excessively blocking the carbazole skeleton that handles charge transport, 0 to 4 is preferable. Furthermore, from the standpoint of ease of synthesis, if the carbazole has a substituent, it preferably has a substituent that is in symmetry with respect to the nitrogen atom.
  • In General Formula 4-1, from the standpoint of maintaining charge transport performance, the sum of d and e is preferably 2 or greater. Moreover, R8 is preferably substituted in the meta [position] with respect to the other benzene ring. The reason for this is that with the ortho substitution, the bond is easily broken because of the high steric hindrance of the adjacent substituents, so durability suffers. In addition, with para substitution, the molecular shape approaches a rigid rod shape, making it more likely that element degradation will occur under high temperature conditions because crystallization is more apt to occur. In concrete terms, the compound preferably is expressed by the following structure:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00061
  • In the formula described above, R8 has the same meaning as R8 in General Formula 4-1, and h and i are each independently 0 or 1 and preferably 0.
  • The R9 [groups] represent each independently a substituent. g is an integer from 0 to 8.
  • The preferred ranges for R9 and g are the same as those in General Formula 5 above.
  • In General Formula 4-2, from the standpoint of maintaining charge transport performance, f is preferably 2 or greater. If f is 2 or 3, the R8 [groups] are preferably substituted in the meta [position] to each other, for the same reason. In concrete terms, the compound is preferably expressed by the following structure:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00062
  • The R9 [groups] in the formula described above represent each independently a substituent. g is an integer from 0 to 8.
  • The preferred ranges of R9 and g are the same as those in General Formula 5 above.
  • If there is a hydrogen atom in General Formulas 4-1 and 4-2, isotopes of hydrogen (such as a deuterium atom) are also included. In this case, all of the hydrogen atoms in the compound may be replaced with hydrogen isotopes, or the compound may be a mixture in which just some of the hydrogens are hydrogen isotopes. Preferably, R9 in General Formula 5 is replaced by deuterium, and the following structure is an especially preferable example:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00063
  • Atoms further constituting a substituent also encompass isotopes thereof.
  • Compounds expressed by General Formulas 4-1 and 4-2 can be synthesized by combining various publicly known synthesis methods. Most commonly, for a carbazole compound, an example involves synthesis by dehydroaromatization following Aza-Cope rearrangement of a condensate of a cyclohexane derivative and aryl hydrazine (Seimitsu Yuuki Gousei [Precision Organic Synthesis], by L. F. Tieze and Th. Eicher, translated by Takano and Ogasawara, p. 339 (published by Nankodo)). Furthermore, regarding a coupling reaction of an aryl halide compound and the obtained carbazole compound using a palladium catalyst, examples include methods described in Tetrahedron Letters, vol. 39, p. 617 (1998), ibid., vol. 39, p. 2367 (1998), ibid., vol. 40, p. 6393 (1999). There are no particular restrictions on the reaction temperature or duration, and the conditions given in the aforementioned documents can be applied. Moreover, for some compounds such as mCP, commercially available ones can be used favorably.
  • The compounds expressed by General Formulas 4-1 and 4-2 in the present invention are preferably formed as a thin layer in a vacuum vapor deposition process, but a wet process such as solution coating can also be favorably used. From the standpoints of solubility and vapor deposition suitability, the molecular weight of the compound is preferably 2000 or lower, more preferably 1200 or lower, and especially preferably 800 or lower. In addition, from the standpoint of vapor deposition suitability, it is preferably 250 or higher and especially preferably 300 or higher because if the molecular weight is too low, the vapor pressure will be low, there will be no change from the vapor phase to the solid phase, and it will be difficult to form an organic layer.
  • General Formulas 4-1 and 4-2 are preferably compounds with the structures shown below or in which one or more of the hydrogen atoms have been replaced by deuterium atoms.
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00064
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00065
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00066
  • R8 and R9 in the above formula represent each independently a substituent.
  • Concrete examples of the compounds expressed by General Formulas 4-1 and 4-2 in the present invention are given below, but the present invention is not limited to or by these:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00067
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00068
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00069
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00070
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00071
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00072
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00073
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00074
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00075
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00076
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00077
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00078
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00079
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00080
  • Furthermore, a triphenylene derivative is also favorable as the host material, and a triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-1 below (hereinafter sometimes referred to simply as a “triphenylene derivative”) is preferable.
  • Because the triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-1 is composed solely of carbon and hydrogen atoms, it has excellent chemical stability, some benefits of which are better drive durability and lower probability that changes will occur during high luminance drive.
  • The molecular weight of the triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-1 is preferably within a range of 400 to 1200, more preferably 400 to 1000, and even more preferably 400 to 800. It is preferable for the molecular weight to be at least 400 because a good-quality amorphous thin film can be formed, and if the molecular weight is 1200 or lower, this is preferable in terms of solubility in solvents, sublimation [performance], and vapor deposition suitability.
  • There are no limitations on the applications of the triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-1, and it may be contained not only in the light-emitting layer, but also in any of the organic layers.
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00081
  • (In General Formula Tp-1, R12 to R23 represent each independently a hydrogen atom; an alkyl group; a cyano group; a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group that may be substituted with an alkyl group, a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group; or a group that is a combination of these. However, R12 to R23 will never be all hydrogen atoms.)
  • Examples of the alkyl group represented by R12 to R23 include substituted or unsubstituted groups such as a methyl group, an ethyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, a tert-butyl group, an n-octyl group, an n-decyl group, an n-hexadecyl group, a cyclopropyl group, a cyclopentyl group, and a cyclohexyl group, with a methyl group, an ethyl group, an isopropyl group, a tert-butyl group, or a cyclohexyl group being preferable, and a methyl group, an ethyl group, or a tert-butyl group being more preferable.
  • R12 to R23 are more preferably a C1 to C4 alkyl group; or a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group that may be substituted with a C1 to C4 alkyl group, a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group (these may be further substituted with an alkyl group, a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group).
  • It is especially preferable to use a benzene ring which may be substituted with a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group (these may be further substituted with an alkyl group, a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group).
  • The total number of aryl rings in General Formula Tp-1 is preferably 2 to 8 and more preferably 3 to 5. Within this range, a good-quality amorphous thin-film can be formed, there will be good solubility in solvents, and sublimation performance and vapor deposition suitability will also be good.
  • R12 to R23 preferably have each independently a total carbon number of 20 to 50, and a total carbon number of 20 to 36 is more preferable. Within this range, a good-quality amorphous thin film can be formed, and solubility in solvents, sublimation [performance], and vapor deposition suitability will be favorable.
  • In one mode of the present invention, the triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-1 above is preferably a triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-2 below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00082
  • (In General Formula Tp-2, the plurality of Ar1 [groups] are the same, and are [each] a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group that may be substituted with a cyano group, an alkyl group, a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group, or a group that is a combination of these.)
  • The alkyl group or the phenyl group, fluorenyl group, naphthyl group, or triphenylenyl group that may be substituted with an alkyl group, a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group represented by Ar1 is defined the same as what was listed for R12 to R23, and preferred options are also the same.
  • In another mode of the present invention, the triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-1 above is preferably a triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-3 below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00083
  • In General Formula Tp-3, L represents a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group that may be substituted with a cyano group, an alkyl group, a phenyl group, a fluorenyl group, a naphthyl group, or a triphenylenyl group, or an n-valent linking group that is a combination of these. n represents an integer from 1 to 6.)
  • The alkyl group, phenyl group, fluorenyl group, naphthyl group, or triphenylenyl group forming an n-valent linking group represented by L is defined the same as what was listed for R12 to R23.
  • L is preferably a benzene ring or a fluorene ring that may be substituted with an alkyl group or a benzene ring, or an n-valent linking group that is a combination of these.
  • Preferred concrete examples of L are given below, but [the present invention] is not limited to or by these. Note that the asterisks in the concrete examples indicate bonding with a triphenylene ring.
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00084
  • n is preferably from 1 to 5 and more preferably from 1 to 4.
  • In another mode of the present invention, the triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-1 above is preferably a triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-4 below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00085
  • (in General Formula Tp-4, if there are a plurality of Ar2 [groups], they are the same, and [each] Ar2 represents a cyano group, an alkyl group, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, a triphenylenyl group, or a group that is a combination of these. p and q represent each independently 0 or 1, but p and q will never both be 0. When p and q represent 0 [sic]10, Ar2 represents a hydrogen atom.) 10 Translator's note: These sentences don't seem to make sense. If p and q will never both be 0, they are not really independent, and the last sentence implies that p and q may both be 0.
  • Ar2 is preferably a group that is a combination of a C1 to C4 alkyl group, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, and a triphenylenyl group, and more preferably a group that is a combination of a methyl group, a t-butyl group, a phenyl group, and a triphenylenyl group.
  • It is especially preferable for Ar2 to be a benzene ring substituted at the meta position with a C1 to C4 alkyl group, a phenyl group, a naphthyl group, a triphenylenyl group, or a group that is a combination of these.
  • When the triphenylene derivative according to the present invention is used as the host material of the light-emitting layer of an organoelectroluminescent element or as a charge transport material of a layer adjacent to the light-emitting layer, if there is a large energy gap from the light-emitting material in a thin film state (when the light-emitting material is a phosphorescent material, the lowest excited triplet (T1) energy in a thin film state), this will prevent the emission from being quenched and is advantageous in terms of improving efficiency. On the other hand, from the standpoint of the chemical stability of the compound, it is preferable for the energy gap and the T1 energy not to be too large. The T1 energy in a film state of the triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula Tp-1 is preferably at least 52 kcal/mol and no more than 80 kcal/mol, more preferably at least 55 kcal/mol and no more than 68 kcal/mol, and even more preferably at least 58 kcal/mol and no more than 63 kcal/mol. When a phosphorescent material is used as a light-emitting material, in particular, it is preferable for the T1 energy to be within the aforementioned range.
  • The T1 energy can be found from the short wavelength end in measurement of the phosphorescence emission spectrum of a thin film of the material. For example, the material is formed into a film in a thickness of approximately 50 nm on a washed quartz glass substrate by a vacuum vapor deposition method, and an F-7000 Hitachi fluorescence spectrophotometer (Hitachi High-Technologies) is used to measure the phosphorescence emission spectrum of a thin film at liquid nitrogen temperature. The T1 energy can be found by converting the rising wavelength on the short wavelength side of the emission spectrum thus obtained into energy units.
  • Concrete examples of the triphenylene derivative according to the present invention are shown below, but the present invention is not limited to or by these:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00086
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00087
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00088
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00089
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00090
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00091
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00092
  • Compounds given as examples of the aforementioned aromatic hydrocarbon compound according to the present invention can be synthesized by the methods described in a pamphlet of International Publication 05/013388, a pamphlet of International Publication 06/130598, and a pamphlet of International Publication 09/021107.
  • After synthesis, it is preferable for purification by column chromatography, recrystallization, or the like to be performed, followed by sublimation purification. Sublimation purification not only allows organic impurities to be separated, but also allows inorganic salts, residual solvents, and the like to be effectively removed.
  • Note that the triphenylene derivative is preferably contained in, besides the light-emitting layer, an organic layer that is adjacent to the light-emitting layer between the light-emitting layer and the cathode, but application of this is not limited, and [the triphenylene derivative] may further be contained in any of the organic layers. The light-emitting layer, hole injection layer, hole transport layer, electron transport layer, electron injection layer, exciton blocking layer, charge blocking layer, or a plurality of these can be introduction layers that contain the triphenylene derivative according to the present invention.
  • The organic layer that contains the triphenylene derivative and is adjacent to the light-emitting layer between the cathode and the light-emitting layer is preferably a charge blocking layer or an electron transport layer, and more preferably a charge blocking layer.
  • Containing the triphenylene derivative in a layer adjacent to the light-emitting layer improves the durability and efficiency of the element. When the light-emitting layer is excited, the excitons tend to accumulate at the interface of the light-emitting layer and the adjacent layer, causing a phenomenon of breakdown of the adjacent layer, but because a triphenylene derivative has a structure with high durability, it is less susceptible to breakdown by excitons, which is believed to be why the aforementioned effect is obtained.
  • From the standpoint of ease of synthesis, the triphenylene derivative is preferably composed of only carbon atoms and hydrogen atoms.
  • If the triphenylene derivative is contained in a layer other than the light-emitting layer, it is preferably contained in an amount of 70 to 100 wt %, and more preferably 85 to 100 wt %. If the triphenylene derivative is contained in the light-emitting layer, it is preferably contained in an amount of 0.1 to 99 wt %, more preferably 1 to 95 wt %, and even more preferably 10 to 95 wt %, with respect to the total weight of the light-emitting layer.
  • From the standpoint of stable operation of the organoelectroluminescent element with respect to heat emission in element drive or during high-temperature drive, the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the triphenylene derivative according to the present invention is preferably at least 60° C. and no more than 400° C., more preferably at least 65° C. and no more than 300° C., and even more preferably at least 80° C. and no more than 180° C.
  • Moreover, the host material is preferably a host material with high planarity (hereinafter also referred to as a “planar host compound”) because the regularity of the arrangement state will be higher, and in concrete terms, a compound having a shape in which the aspect ratio is 3 or more is more preferable.
  • The aspect ratio is the ratio of the molecular length and molecular thickness of the compound (molecular length/molecular thickness).
  • From the standpoint of the orientation, the aspect ratio of the host material used in the present invention is preferably 3 or more, and an aspect ratio of 3.5 or more is more preferable.
  • Here, the molecular length and molecular thickness are defined the same as in the description of the light-emitting layer.
  • In addition, among planar host compounds, a compound that is in the form of a disk is preferable as the host material used in the light-emitting layer of the present invention, and a discotic liquid crystalline host compound corresponding to the following is more preferable:
  • Discotic Liquid Crystalline Host Compound
  • A discotic liquid crystalline host compound forms a liquid crystal phase composed of disk-shaped molecules having high planarity.
  • Discotic liquid crystalline host compounds also include compounds having a structure in which linear alkyl groups, alkoxy groups, or substituted benzoyloxy groups are substituted radially as side chains of the mother nucleus at the molecular center. The compound is preferably one in which the molecule or cluster of molecules has rotational symmetry, and a specific orientation can be imparted.
  • The discotic liquid crystalline host compound is preferably selected from among triphenylene derivatives, pyrene derivatives, triazine derivatives, and carbazole derivatives, and more preferably selected from among triphenylene derivatives, pyrene derivatives, and triazine derivatives, and is most preferably a triphenylene derivative.
  • Discotic Liquid Crystalline Triphenylene Derivative
  • Any conventionally known discotic liquid crystalline triphenylene derivative can be used as the triphenylene derivative that exhibits liquid crystallinity, but it may be, for example, a triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula T-I below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00093
  • In General Formula T-I above, RT means RT 1—, RT 1—O—, RT 1—CO—O—, or RT 1—O—CO—. Not all compounds having these groups are discotic liquid crystalline, but a suitable group that will result in discotic liquid crystallinity can be selected and used based on known art or the like. Examples of RT 1 include an alkyl group; an aryl group; a phenylene group, a cyclohexylene group, or another such ring that has been incorporated into an alkyl group; an oxygen atom disposed between a carbon-carbon of an alkyl group, and so forth.
  • In concrete terms, examples of RT 2 include RT 2—, RT 2—O—, RT 2—O—RT 3—, RT 2—O—RT 3—O—, RT 2—O-Ph-COO—, RT 2—(O—RT 3)nT—O-Ph-COO—, RT 2—O-Ph-CH═CH—COO—, and CH2═CH—COO—RT 3—O-Ph-COO—. Here, RT 2 represents an alkyl group which may have a polymerizable group, RT 3 represents an alkylene group, Ph represents a phenylene group which may have a substituent, and nT is the repeating number of —(O—RT 3)— and represents an integer of 1 or greater.
  • RT 2 represents an alkyl group which may have a polymerizable group, and when it has a polymerizable group, having a polymerizable group at the very end of the alkyl group is preferable from the standpoint of the expression of an ND phase. Examples of polymerizable groups include an acrylic acid ester group, a methacrylic acid ester group, a crotonic acid ester group, and an epoxy group, and in terms of the rate of polymerization and the cost and ease of synthesis, an acrylic acid ester group or a methacrylic acid ester group is preferable, with an acrylic acid ester group being more preferable.
  • The carbon number of the alkyl group portion in the alkyl group which may have a polymerizable group represented by RT 2 is preferably within a range of 1 to 20, more preferably a range of 1 to 15, and even more preferably a range of 3 to 10.
  • The carbon number of the alkylene group represented by RT3 is preferably within a range of 1 to 20, more preferably a range of 1 to 15, and even more preferably a range of 3 to 10.
  • Ph represents a phenylene group which may have a substituent, and examples of the substituent which [Ph] may have include a halogen atom such as a fluorine atom, an alkyl group, and an alkoxy group. From the standpoint of the expression of an ND phase, an alkyl group is preferable. The carbon number of the alkyl group or alkoxy group serving as the substituent is preferably within a range of 1 to 20, more preferably a range of 1 to 10, and even more preferably a range of 1 to 6.
  • nT is the repeating number of —(O—RT 3)— and represents an integer of l or greater. nT is preferably an integer from 1 to 10, more preferably an integer from 1 to 6, and even more preferably an integer from 1 to 3.
  • From the standpoint of the expression of an ND phase, RT is preferably RT 2—O-Ph-COO—, RT 2—(O—RT 3)nT—O-Ph-COO—, or RT 2—O-Ph-CH═CH—COO—, and more preferably RT 2—O-Ph-COO—.
  • In terms of the expression of an ND phase, the triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula T-I above is preferably a triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula T-II below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00094
  • In General Formula T-II above, RT 1 represents RT 2—O-Ph-CO—, RT 2—(O—RT 3)nT—O-Ph-CO—, or RT 2—O-Ph-CH═CH—CO—. RT 2, Ph, RT 3, and nT are defined the same as RT 2, Ph, RT 3, and nT in General Formula T-I above. Furthermore, concrete examples and preferred ranges of RT 2, Ph, RT 3, and nT in General Formula T-II above are also the same as those in General Formula T-I above.
  • It is more preferable if RT′ is expressed by one of General Formulas T-II-1 to T-II-5 below because the expression of an ND phase will be better:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00095
  • In General Formulas T-II-1 to T-II-5 above, n and n′ represent each independently an integer of 1 or greater.
  • XT represents a polymerizable group.
  • n represents an integer of 1 or greater. n is preferably an integer from 1 to 20, more preferably an integer from 1 to 15, and even more preferably an integer from 3 to 10.
  • n′ represents an integer of 1 or greater. n′ is preferably an integer from 1 to 10, more preferably an integer from 1 to 6, and even more preferably an integer from 1 to 3.
  • XT represents a polymerizable group, and concrete examples and preferred ranges thereof are the same as the concrete examples and preferred ranges of the polymerizable group that may be possessed by the alkyl group represented by RT 2 in General Formula T-I above.
  • In terms of resistance to electrical oxidation, it is also preferable for the triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula T-I above to be a triphenylene derivative expressed by General Formula T-III below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00096
  • In General Formula T-III above, RT means RT 1—, RT 1—O—, RT 1—CO—O—, or RT 1—O—CO—. Examples of RT 1 include an alkyl group; an aryl group; a phenylene group, a cyclohexylene group, or another such ring that has been incorporated into an alkyl group; an oxygen atom disposed between a carbon-carbon of an alkyl group, and so forth. Concrete examples and preferred ranges of RT are the same as the concrete examples and preferred ranges of RT in General Formula T-I above.
  • Of the triphenylene derivatives that exhibit liquid crystallinity in the present invention, those which manifest a liquid crystal phase between 20 and 300° C. are preferable. 40 to 280° C. is more preferable, and 60 to 250° C. is even more preferable. Here, [the phrase] “manifests a liquid crystal phase between 20 and 300° C.” encompasses a case in which the liquid crystal temperature range straddles 20° C. (such as 10 to 22° C.), as well as a case in which it straddles 300° C. (such as 298 to 310° C.). The same holds true of the 40 to 280° C. and the 60 to 250° C. ranges.
  • Concrete examples of triphenylene derivatives that exhibit liquid crystallinity are given below, but the present invention is not limited to or by these:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00097
  • The amount of the host material contained in the light-emitting layer of the present invention is preferably 15 to 97 wt %, more preferably 30 to 95 wt %, and even more preferably 50 to 95 wt % in the light-emitting layer.
  • (Charge Transport Layer)
  • The charge transport layer is a layer in which charge movement occurs when voltage is applied to the organoelectroluminescent element. Concrete examples include a hole injection layer, a hole transport layer, an electron blocking layer, a hole blocking layer, an electron transport layer, or an electron injection layer.
  • —Hole Injection Layer and Hole Transport Layer—
  • The hole injection layer and the hole transport layer are layers having the function of accepting holes from the anode or the anode side and transporting them to the cathode side.
  • In the present invention, it is preferable to include a hole injection layer or a hole transport layer containing an electron-accepting dopant as the organic layer.
  • Examples of the materials used for the hole injection layer and the hole transport layer include publicly known materials such as 2-TNATA, TPD, NPD, DNTPD, and other such arylamine derivatives, CBP, mCP, ICTA, and other such carbazole derivatives, copper phthalocyanine, titanyl phthalocyanine, and other such phthalocyanine derivatives, alpha-4T, alpha-6T, and other such thiophene derivatives, fluorene derivatives, and quinoxaline derivatives. Preferable are arylamine derivatives, phthalocyanine derivatives, quinoxaline derivatives, and carbazole derivatives, and more preferable are arylamine derivatives and quinoxaline derivatives.
  • The thickness of the hole injection layer is generally 5 to 200 nm, preferably 10 to 100 nm, and more preferably 10 to 80 nm.
  • The thickness of the hole transport layer is generally 5 to 200 nm, preferably 5 to 100 nm, and more preferably 5 to 80 nm.
  • —Electron Injection Layer and Electron Transport Layer—
  • The electron injection layer and the electron transport layer are layers having the function of accepting electrons from the cathode or the cathode side and transporting them to the anode side.
  • Examples of the material used for the electron injection layer and the electron transport layer include publicly known materials such as PBD, tertiary butyl PBD, and other such oxadiazole derivatives, imidazopyridine derivatives, triphenylene derivatives, azacarbazole derivatives, Bphen, BCP, and other such phenanthrene derivatives, and Alq3, Balq, and other such aluminum complexes, gallium complexes, zinc complexes, and other such metal complexes. Preferable are imidazopyridine derivatives, triphenylene derivatives, phenanthrene derivatives, aluminum complexes, gallium complexes, zinc complexes, and other such metal complexes, and more preferable are imidazopyridine derivatives, triphenylene derivatives, phenanthrene derivatives, and aluminum complexes.
  • The thickness of the electron injection layer is generally 5 to 100 nm, preferably 20 to 80 nm, and more preferably 25 to 60 nm.
  • The thickness of the electron transport layer is generally 1 to 100 nm, preferably 20 to 80 nm, and more preferably 25 to 60 nm.
  • Regarding the hole injection layer, hole transport layer, electron injection layer, and electron transport layer, what is stated in paragraph numbers [0165] to [0167] in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2008-270736 can be applied to the present invention.
  • —Hole Blocking Layer—
  • The hole blocking layer is a layer having the function of preventing the holes transported from the anode side to the light-emitting layer from escaping to the cathode side. In the present invention, a hole blocking layer can be provided as an organic layer that is adjacent to the light-emitting layer on the cathode side.
  • Examples of organic compounds that constitute a hole blocking layer include aluminum(III) bis(2-methyl-8-quinolinolate11) 4-phenylphenolate (abbreviated as BAlq) and other such aluminum complexes, triazole derivatives, and phenanthroline derivatives such as 2,9-dimethyl-4,7-diphenyl-1,10-phenanthroline (abbreviated as BCP). 11 Translator's note: The Japanese text literally reads “quinolinolate,” but the English text provided in the original document in parentheses here reads “quinolinato.”
  • The thickness of the hole blocking layer is preferably 1 to 500 nm, more preferably 5 to 200 nm, and even more preferably 10 to 100 nm.
  • The hole blocking layer may have a single-layer structure composed of one or more types of the aforementioned materials, or it may have a multilayer structure composed of a plurality of layers of the same composition or different compositions.
  • —Electron Blocking Layer—
  • The electron blocking layer is a layer having the function of preventing the electrons transported from the cathode side to the light-emitting layer from escaping to the anode side. In the present invention, an electron blocking layer can be provided as an organic layer that is adjacent to the light-emitting layer on the anode side.
  • As examples of organic compounds that constitute an electron blocking layer, those listed as [compounds for] the aforementioned hole transport layer can be used.
  • The thickness of the electron blocking layer is preferably 1 to 500 nm, more preferably 5 to 200 nm, and even more preferably 10 to 100 nm.
  • The electron blocking layer may have a single-layer structure composed of one or more types of the aforementioned materials, or may have a multilayer structure composed of a plurality of layers of the same composition or different compositions.
  • (First Intermediate Organic Layer)
  • The first intermediate organic layer in the present invention is composed of at least one organic layer positioned between the anode and the light-emitting layer, and examples of this at least one organic layer include the aforementioned hole injection layer, hole transport layer, and electron blocking layer. The first intermediate organic layer preferably includes at least one hole transport layer and is more preferably composed of a hole injection layer and a hole transport layer.
  • The thickness T1 of the first intermediate organic layer is generally 5 to 200 nm, preferably 10 to 150 nm, and more preferably 10 to 120 nm.
  • (Second Intermediate Organic Layer)
  • The second intermediate organic layer in the present invention is composed of at least one organic layer positioned between the cathode and the light-emitting layer, and examples of this at least one organic layer include the aforementioned hole blocking layer, electron transport layer, and electron injection layer. The second intermediate organic layer preferably includes at least one electron transport layer and is more preferably composed of two electron transport layers or composed of an electron injection layer and an electron transport layer.
  • The thickness T2 of the second intermediate organic layer is greater than 20 nm and less than 80 nm, preferably greater than 20 nm and less than 80 nm [sic], and from the standpoint of power efficiency, it is more preferably at least 25 nm and less than 60 nm.
  • (Thickness T1 of First Intermediate Organic Layer and Thickness T2 of Second Intermediate Organic Layer)
  • In the present invention, the relationship between the thickness T1 (nm) of the first intermediate organic layer and the thickness T2 (nm) of the second intermediate organic layer is such that 1.1<T1/T2<4.0 and also such that 20 nm<T2<80 nm, but from the standpoints of external quantum efficiency and power efficiency, [this relationship] is preferably such that 1.2<T1/T2<3.5 and also such that 20 nm<T2<80 nm, and more preferably such that 1.2<T1/T2<3.0 and also such that 25 nm<T2<80 nm.
  • If the maximum emission wavelength of the light-emitting material according to the present invention is 600 to 700 nm, from the standpoints of external quantum efficiency and power efficiency, the relationship between the thickness T1 (nm) of the first intermediate organic layer and the thickness T2 (nm) of the second intermediate organic layer is preferably such that 1.2<T1/T2<4.0 and also such that 30 nm<T2<80 nm. [This relationship] is more preferably such that 1.5<T1/T2<3.5 and also such that 30 nm<T2<80 nm, and even more preferably such that 1.8<T1/T2<3.0 and also such that 50 nm<T2<80 nm.
  • The aforementioned platinum complexes can be cited as examples of the light-emitting material in which the maximum emission wavelength is 600 to 700 nm.
  • If the maximum emission wavelength of the light-emitting material according to the present invention is 400 to 500 nm, then from the standpoints of external quantum efficiency and power efficiency, the relationship between the thickness T1 (nm) of the first intermediate organic layer and the thickness T2 (nm) of the second intermediate organic layer is preferably such that 1.1<T1/T2<3.0 and also such that 20 nm<T2<70 nm. [This relationship] is more preferably such that 1.2<T1/T2<2.8 and also such that 25 nm<T2<60 nm, and even more preferably such that 1.2<T1/T2<2.5 and also such that 30 nm<T2<50 nm.
  • The aforementioned pyrene derivatives and π-conjugated compounds can be cited as examples of the light-emitting material in which the maximum emission wavelength is 400 to 500 nm, with pyrene derivatives being preferable.
  • The maximum emission wavelength of the light-emitting material can be measured with an absolute quantum yield measurement device, a fluorescence spectrophotometer, or the like.
  • <Protective Layer>
  • In the present invention, the entire organic EL element may be protected by a protective layer.
  • Regarding the protective layer, what is stated in paragraph numbers [0169] and [0170] in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2008-270736 can be applied to the present invention.
  • <Sealing Container>
  • The element of the present invention may be entirely sealed by using a sealing container.
  • Regarding the sealing container, what is stated in paragraph number [0171] in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2008-270736 can be applied to the present invention.
  • <Drive>
  • The organoelectroluminescent element of the present invention can emit light by applying direct current (may include an alternating current component as needed) voltage (usually 2 to 15 volts) or DC current between the anode and the cathode.
  • For the method for driving the organoelectroluminescent element of the present invention, it is possible to apply the drive methods described in the respective Specifications or the like of Japanese Laid-Open Patent Applications H2-148687, H6-301355, H5-29080, H7-134558, H8-234685, and H8-241047, Japanese Patent 2,784,615, and U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,828,429 and 6,023,308.
  • The light extraction efficiency of the light-emitting element of the present invention can be improved by a variety of publicly known methods. For instance, the substrate surface shape can be machined (such as forming a fine texture pattern), the refractive index of the substrate, the ITO layer, and the organic layer can be controlled, the film thickness of the substrate and the ITO layer can be controlled, and so forth, all of which allows the light extraction efficiency to be improved and the external quantum efficiency and power efficiency to be raised.
  • The light-emitting element of the present invention is what is known as a top emission type, with which emitted light is extracted from the anode side.
  • The organic EL device of the present invention may have a resonator structure. For example, it may comprise a multilayer film mirror made up of a plurality of laminated films of different refractive indexes, a transparent or semi-transparent electrode, a light-emitting layer, and a metal electrode, all superposed on a transparent substrate. The light generated by the light-emitting layer is repeatedly reflected and resonates, with the metal electrode and the multilayer mirror serving as reflector plates.
  • In another preferred mode, the transparent or semi-transparent electrode and the metal electrode each function as a reflector plate on a transparent substrate, and the light generated by the light-emitting layer is repeatedly reflected and resonates between these.
  • In order to form a resonant structure, the optical path length, which is determined from the effective refractive index of the two reflector plates and the thickness and refractive index of each of the layers between the reflector plates, is adjusted to an optimum value for obtaining the desired resonance wavelength. The calculation formula in the case of the first mode is discussed in the Specification of Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application H9-180883. The calculation formula in the case of the second mode is discussed in the Specification of Japanese Laid-Open Patent Application 2004-127795.
  • The external quantum efficiency of the organoelectroluminescent element of the present invention is preferably at least 5% and more preferably at least 7%. The numerical value of the external quantum efficiency that can be used is the maximum value for external quantum efficiency when the element is driven at 20° C., or the value for external quantum efficiency near 100 to 300 cd/m2 when the element is driven at 20° C.
  • The internal quantum efficiency of the organoelectroluminescent element of the present invention is preferably at least 30%, more preferably at least 50%, and even more preferably at least 70%. The internal quantum efficiency of the element is calculated by dividing the external quantum efficiency by the light extraction efficiency. The light extraction efficiency is approximately 20% with an ordinary organic EL element, but the light extraction efficiency can be raised to 20% or higher by modifying the shape of the substrate, the shape of the electrodes, the thickness of the organic layers, the thickness of the inorganic layers, the refractive index of the organic layers, the refractive index of the inorganic layers, and so forth.
  • (Applications of the Light-Emitting Element of the Present Invention)
  • The light-emitting element of the present invention can be utilized favorably in light emission devices, pixels, display elements, display devices, displays, backlights, electronic photography, illumination light sources, illumination devices, recording light sources, exposure light sources, reading light sources, road signs, trade signs, interior decorating, optical communications, and so forth. [This element] can be especially favorably used in devices that are driven in areas of high light emission brightness, such as in light emission devices, illumination devices, and display devices.
  • Next, the light emission device of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 2.
  • The light emission device of the present invention makes use of the aforementioned organoelectroluminescent element.
  • FIG. 2 is a sectional view schematically showing one example of the light emission device of the present invention.
  • The light emission device 20 in FIG. 2 is made up of a transparent substrate (supporting substrate) 2, an organoelectroluminescent element 10, a sealing container 16, and the like.
  • The organoelectroluminescent element 10 is configured such that an anode (first electrode) 3, an organic layer 11, and a cathode (second electrode) 9 are sequentially laminated over the substrate 2. Furthermore, a protective layer 12 is laminated over the cathode 9, and in addition, the sealing container 16 is provided on the protective layer 12 via an adhesive layer 14. Note that parts of the electrodes 3 and 9, partitions, insulating layers, and so forth are not depicted.
  • Here, an epoxy resin or other such photosetting adhesive or thermosetting adhesive can be used as the adhesive layer 14. For example, a thermosetting adhesive sheet can also be used.
  • There are no particular restrictions on the applications of the light emission device of the present invention, but examples other than illumination devices include television sets, personal computers, portable telephones, electronic paper, and other such display devices.
  • (Illumination Device)
  • Next, the illumination device according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. 3.
  • FIG. 3 is a sectional view schematically showing one example of the illumination device according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • As is shown in FIG. 3, the illumination device 40 according to an embodiment of the present invention comprises the aforementioned organic EL element 10 and a light-scattering member 30. In more concrete terms, the illumination device 40 is configured such that the substrate 2 of the organic EL element 10 is in contact with the light-scattering member 30.
  • There are no particular restrictions on the light-scattering member 30 as long as it is capable of scattering light, but in FIG. 3, it is a member in which microparticles 32 are dispersed in a transparent substrate 31. A glass substrate, for example, can be used favorably as the transparent substrate 31. Transparent resin microparticles can be used favorably as the microparticles 32. The glass substrate and the transparent resin microparticles can both be from prior art. This type of illumination device 40 is devised such that when light emitted from the organoelectroluminescent element 10 is incident on a light incidence face 30A of the light-scattering member 30, the incident light is scattered by the light-scattering member 30, and the scattered light exits a light emission face 30B as illuminating light.
  • WORKING EXAMPLES
  • The present invention will be described below in more concrete terms by giving working examples. The materials, reagents, substance quantities and ratios thereof, operations, and so forth given in the following working examples can be modified as needed without departing from the gist of the present invention. Therefore, the scope of the present invention is not limited to the following concrete examples:
  • The solvent mixing ratios given below are in volumetric ratio.
  • Synthesis Example 1 Synthesis of E-1
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00098
  • [Key for the text in the chemical formula: compound 1a]
  • Synthesis of Compound 1a
  • Five drops of acetic acid were dropped from a 1 mL Komagome pipette into an ethanol solution (30 mL) of 2-hydroxy-4-methoxybenzaldehyde (1.6 g) and 4,5-dimethyl-1,2-phenylenediamine (0.73 g), and [the system] was allowed to react for 6 hours at 80° C. The precipitated solids were filtered off and recrystallized with ethanol, which gave 2.0 g of compound 1a.
  • Synthesis of E-1
  • A DMSO (dimethyl sulfoxide) solution (15 mL) of PtCl2 (0.61 g) was added dropwise at 80° C. to an acetonitrile solution (30 mL) of compound 1a (0.9 g) and sodium acetate (0.19 g), and [the system] was reacted for 7 hours. The reaction solution was filtered and recrystallized with THF, which gave 1.04 g of E-1. Note that the compound was identified by elemental analysis, NMR, and mass spectrography.
  • (Evaluation of PL (Photoluminescence) Retention)
  • Experimental Example 1
  • A washed quartz substrate was placed in a vapor deposition apparatus, and a film (light-emitting layer) was produced by co-depositing the host material and light-emitting material shown in Table 1 below at the light-emitting material doping concentration (weight concentration) shown in Table 1 below. This was termed Element B.
  • Metallic aluminum was then vapor-deposited in [a thickness of] 70 nm on the aforementioned film formed in Element B, thereby producing a cathode.
  • Without allowing it to touch the air, this laminate was placed in a glove box that had been replaced with nitrogen gas, and sealed using a glass sealing jar and a UV-setting adhesive (XNR5516HV, made by Nagase Chiba12). The element thus obtained was termed Element A. 12 Translator's note: “Nagase Chiba” is now called “Nagase ChemteX.”
  • The film (light-emitting layer) formed as described above was measured for its ART-IR deflection angle to calculate the order parameter (degree of orientation (S)) of the light-emitting material in the light-emitting layer of Element A and Element B.
  • Furthermore, C9220-02 absolute PL quantum efficiency measurement apparatus (made by Hamamatsu Photonics) was used to measure the quantum yield of each element, thereby measuring the absolute PL (photoluminescence) quantum efficiency of the Elements A and B that were produced. [The results were] termed PL (A) and PL (B), respectively.
  • The PL (A) and PL s(B) thus obtained were used to calculate the PL (photoluminescence) retention as follows:

  • PL retention=PL(A)/PL(B)
  • In general, when a metal (such as the aforementioned metallic aluminum) is laminated, of the phosphorescent component that is generated through photoexcitation, the optical wave component that vibrates in a direction perpendicular to the metal is quenched by the metal, and therefore not released from the film to the outside, so the quantum yield/PL retention decreases. On the other hand, quenching decreases and PL retention increases (that is, the PL is maintained) when the light-emitting material is oriented.
  • Experimental Examples 2 and 3
  • Other than changing the host material, the light-emitting material, and the doping concentration (weight concentration) of the light-emitting material in Experimental Example 1 as shown in Table 1 below, the order parameter (degree of orientation (S)) and the PL retention were found in the same manner as in Experimental Example 1. These results are given in Table 1 below:
  • TABLE 1
    Light- Degree of
    emitting Doping orientation
    material concentration Host material (S) PL (A) PL (B) PL retention
    Experimental E-1
    15% H-1 0.72 0.24 0.34 0.71
    Example 1
    Experimental E-1  9% H-2 0.57 0.12 0.24 0.50
    Example 2
    Experimental E-2 10% H-2 0.10 0.12 0.44 0.27
    Example 3
  • The structures of the host material and the light-emitting material given in Table 1 are shown below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00099
  • As can be seen from the results in Table 1, the higher is the order parameter (degree of orientation (S)) of the light-emitting material in the light-emitting layer, the higher is the PL retention, and in Experimental Example 1, in which the order parameter is 0.7 or more, the PL retention is particularly excellent. This is surmised to be because when the order parameter is 0.7 or more, the proportion of the emission of the component that undergoes quenching by metals is reduced significantly, and the efficiency of light extraction to the outside (glass substrate) is improved. Therefore, an element with an order parameter of at least 0.7, as in the present invention, allows a higher external quantum efficiency to be attained than a conventional element that does not satisfy such an order parameter condition.
  • Working Examples 1 to 3 and Comparative Examples 1 to 7
  • A glass substrate (OA-10, made by Nippon Electric Glass Co., surface resistance of 10 ohms/square (also referred to as f/sq.), refractive index of 1.47) having an ITO film measuring 2.5 cm2 and 0.5 mm thick was put into a washing vessel and ultrasonically washed in 2-propanol, after which it was subjected to treatment with UV-ozone for 30 minutes. The following organic layers were sequentially deposited onto this transparent anode (ITO film) by a vacuum vapor deposition method:
  • First layer (hole injection layer): HIL-1; film thickness of 10 nm
  • Second layer (hole transport layer): HTL-1; film thickness of 50 nm
  • Third layer (light-emitting layer): E-1 and H-1 (weight ratio of 9:91); film thickness of 30 nm
  • Fourth layer (first electron transport layer): Balq; film thickness of 5 nm
  • Fifth layer (second electron transport layer): Alq3; film thickness of 30 nm
  • Over this, lithium fluoride was vapor-deposited in a thickness of 1 nm, followed by metallic aluminum in a thickness of 70 nm, which gave a cathode. Note that the lithium fluoride (1 nm) constitutes a layer located between the light-emitting layer and the cathode, but because it is an inorganic layer, it is not included in the thickness of the second intermediate organic layer of the present application.
  • This laminate was put in a glove box that had been replaced with nitrogen gas without coming into contact with the air, and was sealed using a glass sealing jar and a UV-setting adhesive (XNR5516HV, made by Nagase Chiba), which gave the element of Working Example 1.
  • Moreover, the order parameter (degree of orientation (S)) of the light-emitting material in the light-emitting layer of the element in Working Example 1 was obtained by placing a washed quartz substrate in a vapor deposition apparatus, co-depositing the host material and the light-emitting material having the same materials and compositions as the aforementioned third layer (light-emitting layer) to produce a film (light-emitting layer), and measuring the ATR-IR deflection thereof to calculate the order parameter (degree of orientation (S)) of the light-emitting material in this film, and the value thus obtained was used. Note that the light-emitting material being oriented in the horizontal direction with the substrate was confirmed by the fact that the order parameter (degree of orientation (S)) of the light-emitting material calculated in this way was 0.7 or more.
  • Other than changing the film thicknesses and materials of the various layers to the thicknesses and materials shown in Table 2 below, elements of Working Examples 2 and 3 and Comparative Examples 1 to 7 were obtained in the same manner as in Working Example 1.
  • The performance of the elements was evaluated as follows:
  • (a) External Quantum Efficiency
  • Using a source measurement unit 2400 made by Toyo Technica, DC voltage was applied to each element to cause it to emit light, and the brightness thereof was measured using a BM-8 brightness meter made by Topcon. The emission wavelength and the emission spectrum were measured using a PMA-11 spectrum analyzer made by Hamamatsu Photonics. Based on these [results], the external quantum efficiency when the brightness was close to 500 cd/m2 was calculated by a brightness conversion method.
  • Note that the results for Working Examples 1 to 3 and Comparative Examples 1 to 3 given in Table 2 are relative values obtained using 1.0 for the external quantum efficiency in Comparative Example 1. For the efficiency, a larger number is preferable.
  • In addition, the results for Comparative Examples 4 and 5 given in Table 2 are relative values obtained using 1.0 for the external quantum efficiency in Comparative Example 5, and the results for Comparative Examples 6 and 7 are relative values obtained using 1.0 for the external quantum efficiency in Comparative Example 7.
  • (b) Power Efficiency
  • Using a source measurement unit 2400 made by Toyo Technica, DC voltage was applied to each element to cause it to emit light, and the brightness thereof was measured using a BM-8 brightness meter made by Topcon. The emission wavelength and the emission spectrum were measured using a PMA-11 spectrum analyzer made by Hamamatsu Photonics. Based on these [results], the power efficiency (1 m/W) when the brightness was close to 500 cd/m2 was calculated. Note that the results for Working Examples 1 to 3 and Comparative Examples 1 to 3 given in Table 2 are relative values obtained using 1.0 for the power efficiency in Comparative Example 1. Furthermore, the results for Comparative Examples 4 and 5 given in Table 2 are relative values obtained using 1.0 for the power efficiency in Comparative Example 5, and the results for Comparative Examples 6 and 7 are relative values obtained using 1.0 for the power efficiency in Comparative Example 7. For the efficiency, a larger number is preferable.
  • The above results are given in Table 2 below along with the film thickness T1 of the first intermediate organic layer, the film thickness T2 of the second intermediate organic layer, the T1/T2 value, and the maximum emission wavelength of the light-emitting material, for each element.
  • TABLE 2
    Light-emitting layer First electron transport Second electron transport
    Hole injection layer Hole transport layer Light- layer layer
    Thickness Thickness emitting Host Thickness Thickness Thickness
    Material (nm) Material (nm) material material (nm) Material (nm) Material (nm)
    Working Example 1 HIL-1 10 HTL-1 50 E-1 H-1 30 Balq 5 Alq3 30
    Working Example 2 HIL-1 10 HTL-1 38 E-1 H-1 30 Balq 5 Alq3 35
    Working Example 3 HIL-1 10 HTL-1 100 E-1 H-1 30 Balq 5 Alq3 35
    Comparative Ex. 1 HIL-1 10 HTL-1 30 E-1 H-1 30 Balq 5 Alq3 45
    Comparative Ex. 2 HIL-1 10 HTL-1 160 E-1 H-1 30 Balq 5 Alq3 80
    Comparative Ex. 3 HIL-1 10 HTL-1 160 E-1 H-1 30 Balq 5 Alq3 35
    Comparative Ex. 4 HIL-1 10 HTL-1 50 E-1 H-2 30 ETL-1 3 Alq3 32
    Comparative Ex. 5 HIL-1 10 HTL-1 33 E-1 H-2 30 ETL-1 3 Alq3 45
    Comparative Ex. 6 HIL-1 10 HTL-1 50 E-2 H-2 30 Balq 5 Alq3 30
    Comparative Ex. 7 HIL-1 10 HTL-1 30 E-2 H-2 30 Balq 5 Alq3 45
    External quantum
    Orientation T1 T2 efficiency Power efficiency Maximum emission
    (S) (nm) (nm) T1/T2 (relative value) (relative value) wavelength (nm)
    Working 0.73 60 35 1.7 1.3 1.6 600
    Example 1
    Working 0.73 48 40 1.2 1.1 1.2 600
    Example 2
    Working 0.73 110 40 2.8 1.8 1.9 600
    Example 3
    Comparative 0.73 40 50 0.8 1.0 1.0 600
    Example 1 (reference) (reference)
    Comparative 0.73 170 85 2.0 0.8 0.7 600
    Example 2
    Comparative 0.73 170 40 4.3 0.9 0.9 600
    Example 3
    Comparative 0.57 60 35 1.7 1.0 1.0 600
    Example 4
    Comparative 0.57 43 48 0.9 1.0 1.0 600
    Example 5 (reference) (reference)
    Comparative 0.15 60 35 1.7 0.8 0.8 624
    Example 6
    Comparative 0.15 40 50 0.8 1.0 1.0 624
    Example 7 (reference) (reference)
  • The structures of materials other than the aforementioned ones given in Table 2 will be shown below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00100
  • As can be seen from the results in Table 2, a comparison of Working Examples 1 to 3 and Comparative Examples 1 to 3, in which the order parameter (degree of orientation (S)) is the same, reveals that the external quantum efficiency and the power efficiency were better in Working Examples 1 to 3, in which the relationships 1.1<T1/T2<4.0 and also T2<80 nm were satisfied, than in Comparative Examples to 1 to 3. Moreover, as can be seen from Comparative Examples 4 and 5 and Comparative Examples 6 and 7, when the order parameter (degree of orientation (S)) was less than 0.7, the external quantum efficiency and the power efficiency in Comparative Examples 4 and 6, in which the relationship 1.1<T1/T2<4.0 was satisfied, tended to be the same as or inferior to those in Comparative Examples 5 and 7, in which this relationship was not satisfied.
  • As was described above, it can be seen that with the working examples of the present invention, in which the order parameter (degree of orientation (S)) is at least 0.7, and the relationships 1.1<T1/T2<4.0 and also T2<80 nm are satisfied, it is possible to satisfy both high external quantum efficiency and high power efficiency at the same time.
  • Working Example 4
  • A glass substrate (OA-10, made by Nippon Electric Glass Co., ITO layer thickness of 70 nm, refractive index of 1.47) having an ITO film measuring 2.5 cm2 and 0.7 mm thick was put into a washing vessel and ultrasonically washed in 2-propanol, after which it was subjected to treatment with UV-ozone for 30 minutes. The following organic layers were sequentially deposited onto this transparent anode (ITO film) by a vacuum vapor deposition method:
  • First layer (hole injection layer): HIL-2; film thickness of 40 nm
  • Second layer (hole transport layer): HTL-2; film thickness of 10 nm
  • Third layer (light-emitting layer): BE-1 and H-3 (weight ratio of 5:95); film thickness of 30 nm
  • Fourth layer (first electron transport layer): ETL-3; film thickness of 30 nm
  • Over this, lithium fluoride was vapor-deposited in a thickness of 1 nm, followed by metallic aluminum in a thickness of 70 nm, which gave a cathode. Note that the lithium fluoride (1 nm) constitutes a layer located between the light-emitting layer and the cathode, but because it is an inorganic layer, it is not included in the thickness of the second intermediate organic layer of the present application.
  • This laminate was put in a glove box that had been replaced with nitrogen gas without coming into contact with the air, and was sealed using a glass sealing jar and a UV-setting adhesive (XNR55161HV, made by Nagase Chiba), which gave the element of Working Example 4-1.
  • Other than changing the film thicknesses and materials of the various layers to the thicknesses and materials shown in Table 3 below, elements of Working Examples 4-2 to 4-9 and Comparative Examples 8-1 to 8-5 were obtained in the same manner as in Working Example 4-1.
  • The external quantum efficiency and the power efficiency were calculated in the same manner as in Working Example 1. Relative values with the results of Comparative Example 8-1 being used as the references are given in Table 3 below along with the order parameter (degree of orientation (S)) of the light-emitting material as well as the T1, the T2, the T1/T2 value, and the maximum emission wavelength of the light-emitting material, for each element.
  • TABLE 3
    Light-emitting layer
    Hole injection layer Hole transport layer Light- Electron transport layer
    Thickness Thickness emitting Thickness Thickness
    Material (nm) Material (nm) material Host material (nm) Material (nm)
    Working HIL-2 40 HTL-2 10 BE-1 H-3 30 ETL-3 30
    Example 4-1
    Working HIL-2 40 HTL-2 5 BE-1 H-3 30 ETL-3 30
    Example 4-2
    Working HIL-2 44 HTL-2 10 BE-1 H-3 30 ETL-3 30
    Exampie 4-3
    Working HIL-2 50 HTL-2 13 BE-1 H-3 30 ETL-3 35
    Example 4-4
    Working HIL-2 55 HTL-2 15 BE-1 H-3 30 ETL-3 25
    Example 4-5
    Working HIL-2 40 HTL-2 8 BE-1 H-3 30 ETL-3 40
    Example 4-6
    Working HIL-2 60 HTL-2 10 BE-1 H-3 30 ETL-3 50
    Example 4-7
    Working HIL-2 58 HTL-2 20 BE-1 H-3 30 ETL-3 65
    Example 4-8
    Working HIL-2 59 HTL-2 10 BE-1 H-3 30 ETL-3 60
    Example 4-9
    Comparative HIL-2 96 HTL-2 30 BE-1 H-3 30 ETL-3 30
    Example 8-1
    Comparative HIL-2 30 HTL-2 10 BE-1 H-3 30 ETL-3 40
    Example 8-2
    Comparative HIL-2 14 HTL-2 10 BE-1 H-3 30 ETL-3 15
    Example 8-3
    Comparative HIL-2 98 HTL-2 30 BE-1 H-3 30 ETL-3 80
    Example 8-4
    Comparative HIL-2 45 HTL-2 15 BE-1 H-3 30 ETL-3 15
    Example 8-5
    External quantum
    Orientation T1 T2 efficiency Power efficiency Maximum emission
    (S) (nm) (nm) T1/T2 (relative value) (relative value) wavelength (nm)
    Working 0.7 50 30 1.67 1.9 1.8 465
    Example 4-1
    Working 0.7 45 30 1.50 1.6 1.5 465
    Example 4-2
    Working 0.7 54 30 1.80 1.5 1.5 465
    Example 4-3
    Working 0.7 63 35 1.80 1.6 1.6 465
    Example 4-4
    Working 0.7 70 25 2.80 1.2 1.1 465
    Example 4-5
    Working 0.7 48 40 1.20 1.7 1.5 465
    Example 4-6
    Working 0.7 70 50 1.40 1.6 1.5 465
    Example 4-7
    Working 0.7 78 65 1.20 1.1 1.1 465
    Example 4-8
    Working 0.7 69 60 1.15 1.0 1.1 465
    Example 4-9
    Comparative 0.7 126 30 4.20 1.0 1.0 465
    Example 8-1 (reference) (reference)
    Comparative 0.7 40 40 1.00 0.9 1.0 465
    Example 8-2
    Comparative 0.7 24 15 1.60 0.9 0.8 465
    Example 8-3
    Comparative 0.7 128 80 1.60 0.7 0.6 465
    Example 8-4
    Comparative 0.7 60 15 4.00 0.5 0.5 465
    Example 8-5
  • Working Example 5
  • Other than changing the film thicknesses and materials of the various layers to the thicknesses and materials shown in Table 4 below, elements of Working Examples 5-1 to 5-9 and Comparative Examples 9-1 to 9-5 were obtained in the same manner as in Working Example 4-1.
  • The external quantum efficiency and the power efficiency were calculated in the same manner as in Working Example 1. Relative values with the results of Comparative Example 9-1 being used as the references are given in Table 4 below along with the order parameter (degree of orientation (S)) of the light-emitting material as well as the T1, the T2, the T1/T2 value, and the maximum emission wavelength of the light-emitting material, for each element.
  • TABLE 4
    Light-emitting layer
    Hole injection layer Hole transport layer Light- Electron transport layer
    Thickness Thickness emitting Thickness Thickness
    Material (nm) Material (nm) material Host material (nm) Material (nm)
    Working HIL-2 40 HTL-2 10 BE-2 H-3 30 ETL-3 32
    Example 5-1
    Working HIL-2 40 HTL-2 5 BE-2 H-3 30 ETL-3 30
    Example 5-2
    Working HIL-2 44 HTL-2 10 BE-2 H-3 30 ETL-3 30
    Example 5-3
    Working HIL-2 50 HTL-2 13 BE-2 H-3 30 ETL-3 35
    Example 5-4
    Working HIL-2 55 HTL-2 15 BE-2 H-3 30 ETL-3 25
    Example 5-5
    Working HIL-2 40 HTL-2 15 BE-2 H-3 30 ETL-3 42
    Example 5-6
    Working HIL-2 60 HTL-2 10 BE-2 H-3 30 ETL-3 50
    Example 5-7
    Working HIL-2 58 HTL-2 20 BE-2 H-3 30 ETL-3 65
    Example 5-8
    Working HIL-2 59 HTL-2 10 BE-2 H-3 30 ETL-3 60
    Example 5-9
    Comparative HIL-2 96 HTL-2 30 BE-2 H-3 30 ETL-3 30
    Example 9-1
    Comparative HIL-2 30 HTL-2 10 BE-2 H-3 30 ETL-3 40
    Example 9-2
    Comparative HIL-2 14 HTL-2 10 BE-2 H-3 30 ETL-3 15
    Example 9-3
    Comparative HIL-2 98 HTL-2 30 BE-2 H-3 30 ETL-3 80
    Example 9-4
    Comparative HIL-2 45 HTL-2 15 BE-2 H-3 30 ETL-3 15
    Example 9-5
    External quantum
    Orientation T1 T2 efficiency Power efficiency Maximum emission
    (S) (nm) (nm) T1/T2 (relative value) (relative value) wavelength (nm)
    Working 0.75 50 32 1.56 2.1 2.0 460
    Example 5-1
    Working 0.75 45 30 1.50 1.8 1.6 460
    Example 5-2
    Working 0.75 54 30 1.80 1.6 1.6 460
    Example 5-3
    Working 0.75 63 35 1.80 1.7 1.6 460
    Example 5-4
    Working 0.75 70 25 2.80 1.2 1.1 460
    Example 5-5
    Working 0.75 55 42 1.30 1.6 1.5 460
    Example 5-6
    Working 0.75 70 50 1.40 1.7 1.6 460
    Example 5-7
    Working 0.75 78 65 1.20 1.2 1.1 460
    Example 5-8
    Working 0.75 69 60 1.15 1.1 1.1 460
    Example 5-9
    Comparative 0.75 126 30 4.20 1.0 1.0 460
    Example 9-1 (reference) (reference)
    Comparative 0.75 40 40 1.00 0.9 0.8 460
    Example 9-2
    Comparative 0.75 24 15 1.60 0.8 0.8 460
    Example 9-3
    Comparative 0.75 128 80 1.60 0.7 0.6 460
    Example 9-4
    Comparative 0.75 60 15 4.00 0.6 0.5 460
    Example 9-5
  • Working Example 6
  • Other than changing the film thicknesses and materials of the various layers to the thicknesses and materials shown in Table 5 below, elements of Working Examples 6-1 to 6-9 and Comparative Examples 10-1 to 10-5 were obtained in the same manner as in Working Example 4-1.
  • The external quantum efficiency and the power efficiency were calculated in the same manner as in Working Example 1. Relative values with the results of Comparative Example 10-1 being used as the references are given in Table 5 below along with the order parameter (degree of orientation (S)) of the light-emitting material as well as the T1, the T2, the T1/T2 value, and the maximum emission wavelength of the light-emitting material, for each element.
  • TABLE 5
    Hole Hole Light-emitting layer Electron
    injection layer transport layer Light- transport layer
    Thickness Thickness emitting Host Thickness Thickness
    Material (nm) Material (nm) material material (nm) Material (nm)
    Working Example 6-1 HIL-2 40 HTL-2 10 BE-3 H-3 30 ETL-3 30
    Working Example 6-2 HIL-2 40 HTL-2  5 BE-3 H-3 30 ETL-3 30
    Working Example 6-3 HIL-2 44 HTL-2 10 BE-3 H-3 30 ETL-3 30
    Working Example 6-4 HIL-2 50 HTL-2 13 BE-3 H-3 30 ETL-3 35
    Working Example 6-5 HIL-2 55 HTL-2 15 BE-3 H-3 30 ETL-3 25
    Working Example 6-6 HIL-2 40 HTL-2  8 BE-3 H-3 30 ETL-3 40
    Working Example 6-7 HIL-2 60 HTL-2 10 BE-3 H-3 30 ETL-3 50
    Working Example 6-8 HIL-2 58 HTL-2 20 BE-3 H-3 30 ETL-3 65
    Working Example 6-9 HIL-2 59 HTL-2 10 BE-3 H-3 30 ETL-3 60
    Comparative Example 10-1 HIL-2 99 HTL-2 30 BE-3 H-3 30 ETL-3 30
    Comparative Example 10-2 HIL-2 30 HTL-2 10 BE-3 H-3 30 ETL-3 40
    Comparative Example 10-3 HIL-2 14 HTL-2 10 BE-3 H-3 30 ETL-3 15
    Comparative Example 10-4 HIL-2 98 HTL-2 30 BE-3 H-3 30 ETL-3 80
    Comparative Example 10-5 HIL-2 45 HTL-2 15 BE-3 H-3 30 ETL-3 15
    External
    quantum Power Maximum
    efficiency efficiency emission
    Orientation T1 T2 (relative (relative wavelength
    (S) (nm) (nm) T1/T2 value) value) (nm)
    Working Example 6-1 0.7 50 30 1.67 2.1 2.0 450
    Working Example 6-2 0.7 45 30 1.50 1.7 1.6 450
    Working Example 6-3 0.7 54 30 1.80 1.6 1.5 450
    Working Example 6-4 0.7 63 35 1.80 1.6 1.6 450
    Working Example 6-5 0.7 70 25 2.80 1.1 1.1 450
    Working Example 6-6 0.7 48 40 1.20 1.7 1.5 450
    Working Example 6-7 0.7 70 50 1.40 1.6 1.4 450
    Working Example 6-8 0.7 78 65 1.20 1.2 1.1 450
    Working Example 6-9 0.7 69 60 1.15 1.0 1.1 450
    Comparative Example 10-1 0.7 129 30 4.30 1.0 1.0 450
    (reference) (reference)
    Comparative Example 10-2 0.7 40 40 1.00 0.9 0.9 450
    Comparative Example 10-3 0.7 24 15 1.60 0.7 0.6 450
    Comparative Example 10-4 0.7 128 80 1.60 0.6 0.6 450
    Comparative Example 10-5 0.7 60 15 4.00 0.4 0.4 450
  • Working Example 7
  • Other than changing the film thicknesses and materials of the various layers to the thicknesses and materials shown in Table 6 below, elements of Working Examples 7-1 to 7-9 and Comparative Examples 11-1 to 11-5 were obtained in the same manner as in Working Example 4-1.
  • The external quantum efficiency and the power efficiency were calculated in the same manner as in Working Example 1. Relative values with the results of Comparative Example 11-1 being used as the references are given in Table 6 below along with the order parameter (degree of orientation (S)) of the light-emitting material as well as the T1, the T2, the T1/T2 value, and the maximum emission wavelength of the light-emitting material, for each element.
  • TABLE 6
    Light-emitting layer
    Hole injection layer Hole transport layer Light- Electron transport layer
    Thickness Thickness emitting Thickness Thickness
    Material (nm) Material (nm) material Host material (nm) Material (nm)
    Working HIL-2 40 HTL-2 10 BE-4 H-3 30 ETL-3 32
    Example 7-1
    Working HIL-2 40 HTL-2 5 BE-4 H-3 30 ETL-3 30
    Example 7-2
    Working HIL-2 44 HTL-2 10 BE-4 H-3 30 ETL-3 30
    Example 7-3
    Working HIL-2 50 HTL-2 13 BE-4 H-3 30 ETL-3 35
    Example 7-4
    Working HIL-2 55 HTL-2 15 BE-4 H-3 30 ETL-3 25
    Example 7-5
    Working HIL-2 40 HTL-2 15 BE-4 H-3 30 ETL-3 42
    Example 7-6
    Working HIL-2 60 HTL-2 10 BE-4 H-3 30 ETL-3 50
    Example 7-7
    Working HIL-2 58 HTL-2 20 BE-4 H-3 30 ETL-3 65
    Example 7-8
    Working HIL-2 59 HTL-2 10 BE-4 H-3 30 ETL-3 60
    Example 7-9
    Comparative HIL-2 96 HTL-2 30 BE-4 H-3 30 ETL-3 30
    Example 11-1
    Comparative HIL-2 30 HTL-2 10 BE-4 H-3 30 ETL-3 40
    Example 11-2
    Comparative HIL-2 14 HTL-2 10 BE-4 H-3 30 ETL-3 15
    Example 11-3
    Comparative HIL-2 98 HTL-2 30 BE-4 H-3 30 ETL-3 80
    Example 11-4
    Comparative HIL-2 45 HTL-2 15 BE-4 H-3 30 ETL-3 15
    Example 11-5
    External
    quantum
    Orientation T1 T2 efficiency Power efficiency Maximum emission
    (S) (nm) (nm) T1/T2 (relative value) (relative value) wavelength (nm)
    Working 0.84 50 32 1.56 2.4 2.3 440
    Example 7-1
    Working 0.84 45 30 1.50 2.0 1.9 440
    Example 7-2
    Working 0.84 54 30 1.80 1.8 1.8 440
    Example 7-3
    Working 0.84 63 35 1.80 1.8 1.7 440
    Example 7-4
    Working 0.84 70 25 2.80 1.3 1.2 440
    Example 7-5
    Working 0.84 55 42 1.30 1.7 1.5 440
    Example 7-6
    Working 0.84 70 50 1.40 1.7 1.6 440
    Example 7-7
    Working 0.84 78 65 1.20 1.4 1.2 440
    Example 7-8
    Working 0.84 69 60 1.15 1.2 1.2 440
    Example 7-9
    Comparative 0.84 126 30 4.20 1.0 1.0 440
    Example 11-1 (reference) (reference)
    Comparative 0.84 40 40 1.00 0.9 0.9 440
    Example 11-2
    Comparative 0.84 24 15 1.60 0.8 0.8 440
    Example 11-3
    Comparative 0.84 128 80 1.60 0.8 0.6 440
    Example 11-4
    Comparative 0.84 60 15 4.00 0.7 0.7 440
    Example 11-5
  • The structures of the materials given in Tables 3 to 6 are shown below:
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00101
    Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00102
  • It can be seen from the results in Tables 3 to 6 that even when a fluorescent material is used as the light-emitting material, it is possible to satisfy both high external quantum efficiency and high power efficiency at the same time with the working examples of the present invention, in which the order parameter (degree of orientation (S)) is at least 0.7, and the relationships 1.1<T1/T2<4.0 and also 20 nm<T2<80 nm are satisfied.
  • Working Example 8
  • A glass substrate (OA-10, made by Nippon Electric Glass Co., ITO layer thickness of 70 nm, substrate refractive index of 1.47) having an ITO film measuring 2.5 cm2 and 0.7 mm thick was put into a washing vessel and ultrasonically washed in 2-propanol, after which it was subjected to treatment with UV-ozone for 30 minutes. The following organic layers were sequentially deposited onto this transparent anode (ITO film) by a vacuum vapor deposition method:
  • First layer (hole injection layer): HIL-2; film thickness of 40 nm
  • Second layer (hole transport layer): HTL-2; film thickness of 10 nm
  • Third layer (light-emitting layer): BE-1 and H-3 (weight ratio of 5:95); film thickness of 25 nm
  • Fourth layer (first electron transport layer): ETL-1; film thickness of 30 nm
  • Over this, lithium fluoride was vapor-deposited in a thickness of 1 nm, followed by metallic aluminum in a thickness of 70 nm, which gave a cathode. Note that the lithium fluoride (1 nm) constitutes a layer located between the light-emitting layer and the cathode, but because it is an inorganic layer, it is not included in the thickness of the second intermediate organic layer of the present application.
  • This laminate was put in a glove box that had been replaced with nitrogen gas without coming into contact with the air, and was sealed using a glass sealing jar and a UV-setting adhesive (XNR5516HV, made by Nagase Chiba), which gave the element of Working Example 8.
  • Comparative Example 12
  • Other than changing as follows, the element of Comparative Example 12 was obtained in the same manner as in Working Example 8:
  • First layer (hole injection layer): HIL-2; film thickness of 95 nm
  • Second layer (hole transport layer): HTL-2; film thickness of 30 nm
  • For the elements of Working Example 8 and Comparative Example 12, the external quantum efficiency and the power efficiency were calculated in the same manner as in Working Example 1. Relative values with the results of Comparative Example 12 being used as the references are given in Table 7 below along with the order parameter (degree of orientation (S)) of the light-emitting material as well as the T1, the T2, the T1/T2 value, and the maximum emission wavelength of the light-emitting material, for each element.
  • TABLE 7
    External Maximum
    quantum Power emission
    Orientation T1 T2 efficiency efficiency wavelength
    (S) (nm) (nm) T1/T2 (relative value) (relative value) (nm)
    Working 0.7 50 30 1.67 1.9 1.9 465
    Example 8
    Comparative 0.7 125 30 4.17 1.0 1.0 465
    Example 12 (reference) (reference)
  • Working Example 9
  • A glass substrate (OA-10, made by Nippon Electric Glass Co., ITO layer thickness of 70 nm, substrate refractive index of 1.47) having an ITO film measuring 2.5 cm2 and 0.7 mm thick was put into a washing vessel and ultrasonically washed in 2-propanol, after which it was subjected to treatment with UV-ozone for 30 minutes. The following organic layers were sequentially deposited onto this transparent anode (ITO film) by a vacuum vapor deposition method:
  • First layer (hole injection layer): HIL-2; film thickness of 40 nm
  • Second layer (hole transport layer): HTL-2; film thickness of 10 nm
  • Third layer (light-emitting layer): BE-1 and H-3 (weight ratio of 5:95); film thickness of 40 nm
  • Fourth layer (first electron transport layer): ETL-1; film thickness of 30 nm
  • Over this, lithium fluoride was vapor-deposited in a thickness of 1 nm, followed by metallic aluminum in a thickness of 70 nm, which gave a cathode. Note that the lithium fluoride (1 nm) constitutes a layer located between the light-emitting layer and the cathode, but because it is an inorganic layer, it is not included in the thickness of the second intermediate organic layer of the present application.
  • This laminate was put in a glove box that had been replaced with nitrogen gas without coming into contact with the air, and was sealed using a glass sealing jar and a UV-setting adhesive (XNR5516HV, made by Nagase Chiba), which gave the element of Working Example 9.
  • Comparative Example 13
  • Other than changing as follows, the element of Comparative Example 13 was obtained in the same manner as in Working Example 9:
  • First layer (hole injection layer): HIL-2; film thickness of 95 nm
  • Second layer (hole transport layer): HTL-2; film thickness of 30 nm
  • The external quantum efficiency and the power efficiency of the elements of Working Example 9 and Comparative Example 13 were calculated in the same manner as in Working Example 1. Relative values with the results of Comparative Example 13 being used as the references are given in Table 8 below along with the order parameter (degree of orientation (S)) of the light-emitting material as well as the T1, the T2, the T1/T2 value, and the maximum emission wavelength of the light-emitting material, for each element.
  • TABLE 8
    External Maximum
    quantum Power emission
    Orientation T1 T2 efficiency efficiency wavelength
    (S) (nm) (nm) T1/T2 (relative value) (relative value) (nm)
    Working 0.7 50 30 1.67 1.8 1.7 465
    Example 9
    Comparative 0.7 125 30 4.17 1.0 1.0 465
    Example 13 (reference) (reference)
  • Working Example 10-1
  • A glass substrate (OA-10, made by Nippon Electric Glass Co., ITO layer thickness of 50 nm, substrate refractive index of 1.47) having an ITO film measuring 2.5 cm2 and 0.7 mm thick was put into a washing vessel and ultrasonically washed in 2-propanol, after which it was subjected to treatment with UV-ozone for 30 minutes. The following organic layers were sequentially deposited onto this transparent anode (ITO film) by a vacuum vapor deposition method:
  • First layer (hole injection layer): HIL-2; film thickness of 40 nm
  • Second layer (hole transport layer): HTL-2; film thickness of 10 nm
  • Third layer (light-emitting layer): BE-3 and H-3 (weight ratio of 5:95); film thickness of 30 nm
  • Fourth layer (first electron transport layer): ETL-1; film thickness of 30 nm
  • Over this, lithium fluoride was vapor-deposited in a thickness of 1 nm, followed by metallic aluminum in a thickness of 70 nm, which gave a cathode. Note that the lithium fluoride (1 nm) constitutes a layer located between the light-emitting layer and the cathode, but because it is an inorganic layer, it is not included in the thickness of the second intermediate organic layer of the present application.
  • This laminate was put in a glove box that had been replaced with nitrogen gas without coming into contact with the air, and was sealed using a glass sealing jar and a UV-setting adhesive (XNR5516HV, made by Nagase Chiba), which gave the element of Working Example 10-1.
  • Working Example 10-2
  • Other than changing as follows, the element of Working Example 10-2 was obtained in the same manner as in Working Example 10-1:
  • First layer (hole injection layer): HIL-2; film thickness of 50 nm
  • Second layer (hole transport layer): HTL-2; film thickness of 15 nm
  • Comparative Example 14
  • Other than changing as follows, the element of Comparative Example 14 was obtained in the same manner as in Working Example 10-1:
  • First layer (hole injection layer): HIL-2; film thickness of 95 nm
  • Second layer (hole transport layer): HTL-2; film thickness of 30 nm
  • For the elements of Working Examples 10-1 and 10-2 and Comparative Example 14, the external quantum efficiency and the power efficiency were calculated in the same manner as in Working Example 1. Relative values with the results of Comparative Example 14 being used as the references are given in Table 9 below:
  • TABLE 9
    External
    quantum Power Maximum
    efficiency efficiency emission
    Orientation T1 T2 (relative (relative wavelength
    (S) (nm) (nm) T1/T2 value) value) (nm)
    Working 0.7 50 30 1.67 1.6 1.5 450
    Example 10-1
    Working 0.7 65 30 2.17 1.8 1.9 450
    Example 10-2
    Comparative 0..7 125 30 4.17 1.0 (reference) 1.0 (reference) 450
    Example 14
  • As the results in Tables 7 to 9 also reveal, it can be seen that even when the film thickness of the ITO film or light-emitting layer is changed, it is possible to satisfy both high external quantum efficiency and high power efficiency at the same time with the working examples of the present invention, in which the order parameter (degree of orientation (S)) is at least 0.7, and the relationships 1.1<T1/T2<4.0 and also 20 nm<T2<80 nm are satisfied.
  • (Working Example 11) Mode in which the Light-Scattering Layer (Light Extraction Layer is Formed on the Substrate Production of Microparticle Layer Transfer Material <Formation of Reduced Texture Layer>
  • A substrate made of a polyethylene terephthalate (PET) film with a thickness of 100 μm was coated with a coating solution for producing a reduced texture layer of the following composition, and [this coating] was dried to form a reduced texture layer with an average thickness of 20 μm.
  • Note that the average thickness of the reduced texture layer is an average value found by cutting out part of the reduced texture layer and measuring at 10 sites with a scanning electron microscope (S-3400N made by Hitachi High-Technologies) (the same applies to measurements below).
  • <<Coating Solution for Reduced Texture Layer>>
  • 40 weight parts binder A, 25 weight parts binder B, 10 weight parts plasticizer 1, 0.5 weight part surfactant 1, and 25 weight parts methyl ethyl ketone were mixed to prepare a coating solution for a reduced texture layer.
  • —Binder A—
      • methyl methacrylate/2-ethylhexyl acrylate/benzyl methacrylate/methacrylic acid copolymer (molar ratio)=55/11.7/4.5/28.8 (trade name: Aromatex FM601, made by Mitsui Chemicals, weight average molecular weight of 90,000, 21 wt % solids concentration)
    —Binder B—
      • styrene/acrylic acid copolymer (molar ratio)=63/37 (trade name: Arosetto 7055, made by Nippon Shokubai, weight average molecular weight of 8,000, 41 wt % solids concentration)
    —Plasticizer 1—
      • 2,2-bis[4-(methacryloxypolyethoxy)phenyl]propane (made by Shin-Nakamura Chemical)
    —Surfactant 1—
      • the following structure 1 (30 wt %):
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00103
      • methyl ethyl ketone (70 wt %)
    <Formation of the Intermediate Layer>
  • Next, an intermediate layer with an average thickness of 1.6 μm was formed by coating the aforementioned reduced texture layer with an intermediate layer coating solution having the following composition:
  • —Intermediate Layer Coating Solution—
  • 2.1 weight parts polyvinyl alcohol (PVA205 (saponification value of 88%), made by Kuraray), 0.95 weight part polyvinyl pyrrolidone (PVP, K-30; made by ISP Japan), 44 weight parts methanol, and 53 weight parts distilled water were mixed to prepare an intermediate layer coating solution.
  • <Formation of Microparticle Layer>
  • Next, a microparticle layer with an average thickness of 10 μm was formed by coating the intermediate layer with a microparticle layer composition 1 prepared as follows and drying [this coating]:
  • <<Microparticle Layer Composition 1>>
  • 30 weight parts microparticle dispersion 1 and 8 weight parts propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate (MMPG-Ac, made by Daicel Chemical) were mixed at a temperature of 24° C. (±2° C.) and stirred for 10 minutes at 150 rpm. Then, 53 weight parts methyl ethyl ketone, 5 weight parts binder C, 0.002 weight part hydroquinone monomethyl ether, 4.2 weight parts DPHA solution, 0.16 weight part 2,4-bis(trichloromethyl)-6-[4-(N,N-diethoxycarbonylmethyl)amino-3-bromophenyl]-s-triazine, and 0.044 weight part surfactant 1 were added in this order at a temperature of 25° C. (±2° C.), and [the system] was stirred for 30 minutes at 150 rpm at a temperature of 40° C. (±2° C.) to prepare a microparticle layer composition.
  • —Microparticle Dispersion 1—
      • As first particles, Optobeads 2000M made by Nissan Chemical (100 wt % solids) (average particle size of 2 μm): 45 wt %
      • As second particles, MT-05 microparticle titanium oxide made by Tayca (average particle size of 10 nm, refractive index of 2.72): 9.5 wt %
      • Dispersant expressed by the following structural formula (compound 1): 0.5 wt %
  • Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00104
  • [Key for the Text in the Chemical Formula: Compound 1]
      • polymer (a random copolymer of benzyl methacrylate/methacrylic acid=72/28 (molar ratio), weight average molecular weight of 37,000): 5 wt %
      • propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate: 40 wt %
    —Binder C—
      • polymer (random copolymer of benzyl methacrylate/methacrylic acid=78/22 (molar ratio), weight average molecular weight of 38,000): 27 wt %
      • propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate: 73 wt %
    —DPHA Solution—
      • dipentaerythritol hexacrylate (containing 500 ppm polymerization inhibitor MEHQ, made by Nippon Kayaku, trade name: Kayarad DPHA): 76 wt %
      • propylene glycol monomethyl ether acetate: 24 wt %
  • Finally, a cover film made of polypropylene with a thickness of 12 μm was affixed over the produced microparticle layer, thereby producing a microparticle layer transfer material.
  • A glass substrate (OA-10, Nippon Electric Glass, with a refractive index of 1.47) was placed in a washing vessel and was ultrasonically washed in a neutral detergent, after which it was ultrasonically washed in pure water and then heated and dried for 120 minutes at 120° C. After drying, a silane coupling solution (0.3 wt % aqueous solution of N-β(aminoethyl) γ-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, trade name KBM603, made by Shin-Etsu Chemical) was sprayed onto the aforementioned substrate by shower for 20 seconds, which was followed by washing with a pure water shower and heating and drying (2 hours at 80° C.).
  • Next, with the silane coupling-treated glass substrate thus obtained, the cover film was removed from the microparticle layer transfer material produced as described above, and the surface of the microparticle layer exposed after this removal was superposed over the surface of the aforementioned silane coupling-treated glass substrate such that the two surfaces were in contact, and a laminator was used to laminate the two at a rubber roller temperature of 130° C., a line pressure of 100N/cm, and a conveyance speed of 2.2 meters/minute over a substrate that had been heated for two minutes at 100° C.
  • Afterwards, [this product] was exposed with a proximity-type exposure device having an ultra-high pressure mercury lamp (made by Hitachi High-Tech Electronics Engineering) and heat-treated for 30 minutes at 100° C., thereby producing a high-refractive index glass substrate with an attached microparticle layer, in which the substrate and the microparticle layer were stuck together with substantially no gap, and the base material (base film) serves as a protective sheet.
  • Next, a film of ITO (indium tin oxide) was formed by a sputtering method so as to obtain a thickness of 100 nm on the surface of the aforementioned high-refractive index glass substrate with an attached microparticle layer, on the side opposite from the microparticle layer.
  • An organoelectroluminescent element was produced, [with everything] from the vapor deposition of the first layer (hole injection layer) onward being carried out in the same manner as in Working Example 1.
  • (Working Example 12) Mode in which the Light-Scattering Layer (Light Extraction Layer) is Formed on a High-Refractive Index Glass Substrate with a Refractive Index of at Least 1.8
  • An organoelectroluminescent element was produced in the same manner as in Working Example 11, except that the glass substrate described in Working Example 11 above was changed to SLH-53 (made by Ohara, with a refractive index of 1.81).
  • The external quantum efficiency and power efficiency of the elements produced in Working Examples 11 and 12 above were evaluated in the same manner as in Working Example 1. These results are given in Table 10 along with the results of Working Example 1 and Comparative Example 1 given in Table 2.
  • TABLE 15
    Table 10
    External quantum efficiency Power efficiency
    (relative value) (relative value)
    Working Example 1  1.3 1.6
    Working Example 11 1.6 1.9
    Working Example 12 1.9 2.0
    Comparative Example 1 1.0 (reference) 1.0 (reference)
  • As can be seen from the results in Table 10 above, it became evident that the external quantum efficiency and power efficiency can be increased by providing a light-scattering layer (light extraction layer), and that the additional use of a high-refractive index glass with a refractive index of at least 1.8 as the substrate makes it possible to obtain even higher external quantum efficiency and power efficiency.
  • INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY
  • With the present invention, it is possible to provide an organoelectroluminescent element which can satisfy both high external quantum efficiency and high power efficiency at the same time as well as a light emission device, display device, and illumination device in which such an organoelectroluminescent element is used.
  • The present invention was described in detail and with reference to specific embodiments, but it should be apparent to a person skilled in the art that various modifications and adjustments can be made without departing from the spirit and scope of the present invention.
  • The present application is based on a Japanese patent application filed on Apr. 12, 2011 (Japanese Patent Application 2011-088682) and a Japanese patent application filed on Mar. 12, 2012 (Japanese Patent Application 2012-054390), and the contents thereof are hereby incorporated herein as references.
  • DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS
    • 2 substrate
    • 3 anode
    • 4 hole injection layer
    • 5 hole transport layer
    • 6 light-emitting layer
    • 7 first electron transport layer
    • 8 second electron transport layer
    • 9 cathode
    • 10 organoelectroluminescent element
    • 11 organic layer
    • 12 protective layer
    • 14 adhesive layer
    • 15 light extraction layer
    • 16 sealing container
    • 20 light emission device
    • 30 light-scattering member
    • 30A light incidence face
    • 30B light emission face
    • 31 transparent substrate
    • 32 microparticles
    • 40 illumination device

Claims (10)

1. An organoelectroluminescent element which has on a substrate an anode, a first intermediate organic layer composed of at least one organic layer, a light-emitting layer, a second intermediate organic layer composed of at least one organic layer, and a cathode in this order and in which light is extracted from said anode side, wherein
said light-emitting layer contains a light-emitting material that is oriented in a horizontal direction with the substrate, the order parameter of said light-emitting material in said light-emitting layer is at least 0.7, and
the relationship between thickness T1 (nm) of said first intermediate organic layer and thickness T2 (nm) of said second intermediate organic layer is such that 1.1<T1/T2<4.0 and also such that 20 nm<T2<80 nm.
2. The organoelectroluminescent element according to claim 1, wherein said light-emitting material is a platinum complex, a pyrene derivative, or a π-conjugated compound expressed by General Formula R-1 below:
Figure US20220077413A1-20220310-C00105
wherein each of Ar1 to Ar3 independently represents a divalent C6 to C30 aromatic hydrocarbon group, each of Ar4 to Ar7 independently represents a C6 to C30 aromatic hydrocarbon group, the two aromatic hydrocarbon groups constituting Ar4 and Ar5 may bond via a direct bond or a substituent to form a condensed heterocycle with the N replaced by Ar4 and A5, and the two aromatic hydrocarbon groups constituting Ar6 and Ar7 may bond via a direct bond or a substituent to form a condensed heterocycle with the N replaced by Ar6 and Ar7; each of L1 and L2 independently represents a vinylene group or an acetylene group; and each of l, m, n, o, and p independently represents an integer from 0 to 6, but one of l, n, and p is not 0.
3. The organoelectroluminescent element according to claim 1, wherein said light-emitting layer further contains a host material, and this host material is a triphenylene derivative.
4. The organoelectroluminescent element according to claim 1, wherein the maximum emission wavelength of said light-emitting material is 600 to 700 nm, and the relationship between the thickness T1 (nm) of said first intermediate organic layer and the thickness T2 (nm) of said second intermediate organic layer is such that 1.2<T1/T2<4.0 and also such that 30 nm<T2<80 nm.
5. The organoelectroluminescent element according to claim 1, wherein the maximum emission wavelength of said light-emitting material is 400 to 500 nm, and the relationship between the thickness T1 (nm) of said first intermediate organic layer and the thickness T2 (nm) of said second intermediate organic layer is such that 1.1<T1/T2<3.0 and also such that 20 nm<T2<70 nm.
6. The organoelectroluminescent element according to claim 1, wherein a light extraction layer is formed on said substrate.
7. The organoelectroluminescent element according to claim 6, wherein the refractive index of said substrate is at least 1.8.
8. A light emission device in which the organoelectroluminescent element according to claim 1 is used.
9. A display device in which the organoelectroluminescent element according to claim 1 is used.
10. An illumination device in which the organoelectroluminescent element according to claim 1 is used.
US17/501,436 2011-04-12 2021-10-14 Organoelectroluminescent Element, and Light Emission Device, Display Device, and Illumination Device in which Said Organoelectroluminescent Element is Used Pending US20220077413A1 (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
US17/501,436 US20220077413A1 (en) 2011-04-12 2021-10-14 Organoelectroluminescent Element, and Light Emission Device, Display Device, and Illumination Device in which Said Organoelectroluminescent Element is Used

Applications Claiming Priority (7)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2011088682 2011-04-12
JP2011-088682 2011-04-12
JP2012-054390 2012-03-12
JP2012054390A JP5981736B2 (en) 2011-04-12 2012-03-12 ORGANIC ELECTROLUMINESCENT ELEMENT, AND LIGHT EMITTING DEVICE, DISPLAY DEVICE AND LIGHTING DEVICE USING THE ORGANIC ELECTROLUMINESCENT ELEMENT
PCT/JP2012/059578 WO2012141108A1 (en) 2011-04-12 2012-04-06 Organoelectroluminescent element, and light emission device, display device, and illumination device in which said organoelectroluminescent element is used
US201414110669A 2014-02-05 2014-02-05
US17/501,436 US20220077413A1 (en) 2011-04-12 2021-10-14 Organoelectroluminescent Element, and Light Emission Device, Display Device, and Illumination Device in which Said Organoelectroluminescent Element is Used

Related Parent Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2012/059578 Continuation WO2012141108A1 (en) 2011-04-12 2012-04-06 Organoelectroluminescent element, and light emission device, display device, and illumination device in which said organoelectroluminescent element is used
US14/110,669 Continuation US11177450B2 (en) 2011-04-12 2012-04-06 Organoelectroluminescent element, and light emission device, display device, and illumination device in which said organoelectroluminescent element is used

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
US20220077413A1 true US20220077413A1 (en) 2022-03-10

Family

ID=47009281

Family Applications (2)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/110,669 Active 2033-12-13 US11177450B2 (en) 2011-04-12 2012-04-06 Organoelectroluminescent element, and light emission device, display device, and illumination device in which said organoelectroluminescent element is used
US17/501,436 Pending US20220077413A1 (en) 2011-04-12 2021-10-14 Organoelectroluminescent Element, and Light Emission Device, Display Device, and Illumination Device in which Said Organoelectroluminescent Element is Used

Family Applications Before (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US14/110,669 Active 2033-12-13 US11177450B2 (en) 2011-04-12 2012-04-06 Organoelectroluminescent element, and light emission device, display device, and illumination device in which said organoelectroluminescent element is used

Country Status (3)

Country Link
US (2) US11177450B2 (en)
JP (1) JP5981736B2 (en)
WO (1) WO2012141108A1 (en)

Families Citing this family (15)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP5981736B2 (en) * 2011-04-12 2016-08-31 ユー・ディー・シー アイルランド リミテッド ORGANIC ELECTROLUMINESCENT ELEMENT, AND LIGHT EMITTING DEVICE, DISPLAY DEVICE AND LIGHTING DEVICE USING THE ORGANIC ELECTROLUMINESCENT ELEMENT
WO2014185392A1 (en) * 2013-05-15 2014-11-20 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Organic electroluminescence element
JP6119460B2 (en) * 2013-06-27 2017-04-26 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Light emitting unit and electronic device
US9190620B2 (en) * 2014-03-01 2015-11-17 Universal Display Corporation Organic electroluminescent materials and devices
JP2016143529A (en) * 2015-01-30 2016-08-08 パイオニア株式会社 Light emission device
KR102515564B1 (en) * 2016-05-19 2023-03-28 삼성전자주식회사 Organic light emitting diode device
KR102353663B1 (en) * 2016-05-20 2022-01-19 가부시키가이샤 한도오따이 에네루기 켄큐쇼 Light-emitting element, light-emitting device, electronic device, and lighting device
CN206685388U (en) * 2017-03-14 2017-11-28 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 A kind of encapsulating structure, display panel and display device
WO2018198052A1 (en) * 2017-04-26 2018-11-01 Oti Lumionics Inc. Method for patterning a coating on a surface and device including a patterned coating
US11751415B2 (en) 2018-02-02 2023-09-05 Oti Lumionics Inc. Materials for forming a nucleation-inhibiting coating and devices incorporating same
JP7390739B2 (en) 2019-03-07 2023-12-04 オーティーアイ ルミオニクス インコーポレーテッド Materials for forming nucleation-inhibiting coatings and devices incorporating the same
KR20220009961A (en) 2019-04-18 2022-01-25 오티아이 루미오닉스 인크. Material for forming nucleation inhibiting coating and device comprising same
JP7576337B2 (en) 2019-05-08 2024-11-01 オーティーアイ ルミオニクス インコーポレーテッド Materials for forming nucleation-inhibiting coatings and devices incorporating same - Patents.com
CN112382730B (en) * 2020-11-11 2024-06-04 京东方科技集团股份有限公司 Organic light emitting diode, preparation method, display panel and display device
CA3240373A1 (en) 2020-12-07 2022-06-16 Michael HELANDER Patterning a conductive deposited layer using a nucleation inhibiting coating and an underlying metallic coating

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20030205707A1 (en) * 2002-05-01 2003-11-06 Che Chi-Ming Electroluminescent materials
US20060073359A1 (en) * 2004-09-27 2006-04-06 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Light-emitting device
US20130033174A1 (en) * 2010-03-31 2013-02-07 Universal Display Corporation Ireland Limited (UDI) Material for organic electroluminescence element and organic electroluminescence element using the same, and method for manufacturing organic electroluminescence element
US11177450B2 (en) * 2011-04-12 2021-11-16 Udc Ireland Limited Organoelectroluminescent element, and light emission device, display device, and illumination device in which said organoelectroluminescent element is used

Family Cites Families (18)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP4136185B2 (en) * 1999-05-12 2008-08-20 パイオニア株式会社 Organic electroluminescent multicolor display and method for manufacturing the same
JP2002043056A (en) * 2000-07-19 2002-02-08 Canon Inc Light-emitting element
JP4088471B2 (en) * 2002-03-29 2008-05-21 松下電器産業株式会社 Organic light emitting device and method for manufacturing the same
JP2004335122A (en) * 2003-04-30 2004-11-25 Takasago Internatl Corp Light emitting element
JP2005243432A (en) * 2004-02-26 2005-09-08 Fuji Photo Film Co Ltd Light-emitting element
US7771845B2 (en) * 2005-03-14 2010-08-10 Fujifilm Corporation Organic electroluminescent device
EP1919928B1 (en) * 2005-03-16 2012-10-24 Fujifilm Corporation Platinum complex compound and organic electroluminescent device
JP5095612B2 (en) * 2005-05-31 2012-12-12 ユニバーサル ディスプレイ コーポレイション Triphenylene host in phosphorescent light-emitting diodes
JP4478166B2 (en) * 2006-11-09 2010-06-09 三星モバイルディスプレイ株式會社 Organic light-emitting device provided with organic film containing organometallic complex
JP2009016184A (en) * 2007-07-04 2009-01-22 Fujifilm Corp Organic electroluminescent element
JPWO2009008356A1 (en) * 2007-07-07 2010-09-09 出光興産株式会社 Organic EL device
TWI501943B (en) * 2007-08-08 2015-10-01 Universal Display Corp Single triphenylene chromophores in phosphorescent light emitting diodes
JP5207229B2 (en) * 2007-11-12 2013-06-12 Jnc株式会社 Polarized organic electroluminescent device
WO2009066778A1 (en) * 2007-11-22 2009-05-28 Idemitsu Kosan Co., Ltd. Organic el element and solution containing organic el material
JP5090227B2 (en) * 2008-03-26 2012-12-05 学校法人金沢工業大学 Organic electroluminescence element, lighting device and display device
JP5423171B2 (en) * 2009-06-19 2014-02-19 東洋インキScホールディングス株式会社 Material for organic electroluminescence device and use thereof
JP2011046699A (en) * 2009-07-31 2011-03-10 Sumitomo Chemical Co Ltd Metal complex, composition including the same, and light-emitting element using the same
JP5718023B2 (en) * 2010-11-08 2015-05-13 ユー・ディー・シー アイルランド リミテッド Organic electroluminescent device and method for producing organic electroluminescent device

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20030205707A1 (en) * 2002-05-01 2003-11-06 Che Chi-Ming Electroluminescent materials
US20060073359A1 (en) * 2004-09-27 2006-04-06 Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Light-emitting device
US20130033174A1 (en) * 2010-03-31 2013-02-07 Universal Display Corporation Ireland Limited (UDI) Material for organic electroluminescence element and organic electroluminescence element using the same, and method for manufacturing organic electroluminescence element
US11177450B2 (en) * 2011-04-12 2021-11-16 Udc Ireland Limited Organoelectroluminescent element, and light emission device, display device, and illumination device in which said organoelectroluminescent element is used

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
WO2011/125756 (Year: 2011) *

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JP5981736B2 (en) 2016-08-31
JP2012231125A (en) 2012-11-22
WO2012141108A1 (en) 2012-10-18
US11177450B2 (en) 2021-11-16
US20140225085A1 (en) 2014-08-14

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US20220077413A1 (en) Organoelectroluminescent Element, and Light Emission Device, Display Device, and Illumination Device in which Said Organoelectroluminescent Element is Used
US11700769B2 (en) Organic electroluminescent element, compound, and light emitting device, display device and lighting system, using said element
KR101735757B1 (en) Organic electroluminescent device and charge transport material
US10944061B2 (en) Organic electroluminescent element and compound
US9954190B2 (en) Organic electric-field light-emitting element, light-emitting material for organic electric-field light-emitting element, and light-emitting device, display device, and illumination device using same element
WO2012133644A1 (en) Organic electroluminescent element, light-emitting device using organic electroluminescent element, display device using organic electroluminescent element, lighting device using organic electroluminescent element, and compound for organic electroluminescent element
US10388903B2 (en) Charge-transporting material, organic electroluminescent element, and light-emitting device, display device and illumination device characterised by using said element
US9691988B2 (en) Organic electroluminescent element, light-emitting material for organic electroluminescent element, and light-emitting device, display device, and illumination device using said element
US9676717B2 (en) Organic electroluminescence device
JP5872930B2 (en) Organic electroluminescent device and charge transport material
US10804469B2 (en) Charge transport material, organic electroluminescent element, and illumination device, display device, or light-emitting device characterized by using said element
US20140264301A1 (en) Organic electroluminescent element, and light emitting device, display device and lighting device each using organic electroluminescent element
US20190169097A1 (en) Organic electroluminescence device
US9876175B2 (en) Organic electroluminescent element, material for organic electroluminescent element, and light emitting device, display device and lighting device each using organic electroluminscent element
US10505116B2 (en) Organic electroluminescent element and compound
US9647214B2 (en) Organic electroluminescent element, compound for organic electroluminescent element, and light-emitting device, display device, and illumination device using said element
US9397303B2 (en) Organic electroluminescent element, material for said element, and light-emitting device, display device, and illumination device using said element
US9825237B2 (en) Organic electroluminescent element, compound for organic electroluminescent element, and light-emitting device, display device, and illumination device using said element
CN115368343A (en) Compound with pyridine derivative as core and application thereof
CN114787170A (en) Pyrromethene boron complex, and light-emitting element, display device, and lighting device each containing same
US9627623B2 (en) Organic electroluminescent element, compound, and light emitting device, display device and lighting device each using organic electroluminescent element
US9133118B2 (en) Organic electroluminescence device
US20230145851A1 (en) Interface layer design for efficient and stable white oleds
US20220073551A1 (en) Non-planar blue phosphorescent emitters based on functionalized imidazolyl group
US20220102641A1 (en) Functional materials for oled applications

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: FINAL REJECTION MAILED

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: NON FINAL ACTION MAILED

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: RESPONSE TO NON-FINAL OFFICE ACTION ENTERED AND FORWARDED TO EXAMINER

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: FINAL REJECTION MAILED

STPP Information on status: patent application and granting procedure in general

Free format text: DOCKETED NEW CASE - READY FOR EXAMINATION